1 | <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
---|
2 | <!DOCTYPE chapter PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.5//EN"
|
---|
3 | "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.5/docbookx.dtd"[
|
---|
4 | <!ENTITY % all.entities SYSTEM "all-entities.ent">
|
---|
5 | %all.entities;
|
---|
6 | ]>
|
---|
7 | <chapter id="AdvancedTopics">
|
---|
8 |
|
---|
9 | <title>Advanced Topics</title>
|
---|
10 |
|
---|
11 | <sect1 id="autologon">
|
---|
12 |
|
---|
13 | <title>Automated Guest Logins</title>
|
---|
14 |
|
---|
15 | <para>
|
---|
16 | &product-name; provides Guest Addition modules for Windows, Linux,
|
---|
17 | and Oracle Solaris to enable automated logins on the guest.
|
---|
18 | </para>
|
---|
19 |
|
---|
20 | <para>
|
---|
21 | When a guest operating system is running in a virtual machine, it
|
---|
22 | might be desirable to perform coordinated and automated logins
|
---|
23 | using credentials from a master login system. Credentials are user
|
---|
24 | name, password, and domain name, where each value might be empty.
|
---|
25 | </para>
|
---|
26 |
|
---|
27 | <sect2 id="autologon_win">
|
---|
28 |
|
---|
29 | <title>Automated Windows Guest Logins</title>
|
---|
30 |
|
---|
31 | <para>
|
---|
32 | Windows provides a modular system login subsystem, called
|
---|
33 | Winlogon, which can be customized and extended by means of
|
---|
34 | so-called GINA (Graphical Identification and Authentication)
|
---|
35 | modules. In Windows Vista and later releases, the GINA modules
|
---|
36 | were replaced with a new mechanism called credential providers.
|
---|
37 | The &product-name; Guest Additions for Windows come with both, a
|
---|
38 | GINA and a credential provider module, and therefore enable any
|
---|
39 | Windows guest to perform automated logins.
|
---|
40 | </para>
|
---|
41 |
|
---|
42 | <para>
|
---|
43 | To activate the &product-name; GINA or credential provider
|
---|
44 | module, install the Guest Additions using the command line
|
---|
45 | switch <option>/with_autologon</option>. All the following
|
---|
46 | manual steps required for installing these modules will be then
|
---|
47 | done by the installer.
|
---|
48 | </para>
|
---|
49 |
|
---|
50 | <para>
|
---|
51 | To manually install the &product-name; GINA module, extract the
|
---|
52 | Guest Additions as shown in
|
---|
53 | <xref linkend="windows-guest-file-extraction" />, and copy the
|
---|
54 | <filename>VBoxGINA.dll</filename> file to the Windows
|
---|
55 | <filename>SYSTEM32</filename> directory. In the registry, create
|
---|
56 | the following key with a value of
|
---|
57 | <filename>VBoxGINA.dll</filename>:
|
---|
58 | </para>
|
---|
59 |
|
---|
60 | <screen>HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\Winlogon\GinaDLL</screen>
|
---|
61 |
|
---|
62 | <note>
|
---|
63 | <para>
|
---|
64 | The &product-name; GINA module is implemented as a wrapper
|
---|
65 | around the <filename>MSGINA.DLL</filename> standard Windows
|
---|
66 | GINA module. As a result, it might not work correctly with
|
---|
67 | third-party GINA modules.
|
---|
68 | </para>
|
---|
69 | </note>
|
---|
70 |
|
---|
71 | <para>
|
---|
72 | To manually install the &product-name; credential provider
|
---|
73 | module, extract the Guest Additions as shown in
|
---|
74 | <xref linkend="windows-guest-file-extraction" /> and copy the
|
---|
75 | <filename>VBoxCredProv.dll</filename> file to the Windows
|
---|
76 | <filename>SYSTEM32</filename> directory. In the registry, create
|
---|
77 | the following keys:
|
---|
78 | </para>
|
---|
79 |
|
---|
80 | <screen>HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\
|
---|
81 | Authentication\Credential Providers\{275D3BCC-22BB-4948-A7F6-3A3054EBA92B}
|
---|
82 |
|
---|
83 | HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\CLSID\{275D3BCC-22BB-4948-A7F6-3A3054EBA92B}
|
---|
84 |
|
---|
85 | HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\CLSID\{275D3BCC-22BB-4948-A7F6-3A3054EBA92B}\InprocServer32</screen>
|
---|
86 |
|
---|
87 | <para>
|
---|
88 | All default values, the key named <literal>Default</literal>,
|
---|
89 | must be set to <literal>VBoxCredProv</literal>.
|
---|
90 | </para>
|
---|
91 |
|
---|
92 | <para>
|
---|
93 | Create the following string and assign it a value of
|
---|
94 | <literal>Apartment</literal>.
|
---|
95 | </para>
|
---|
96 |
|
---|
97 | <screen>HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\CLSID\{275D3BCC-22BB-4948-A7F6-3A3054EBA92B}\InprocServer32\ThreadingModel</screen>
|
---|
98 |
|
---|
99 | <para>
|
---|
100 | To set credentials, use the following command on a
|
---|
101 | <emphasis>running</emphasis> VM:
|
---|
102 | </para>
|
---|
103 |
|
---|
104 | <screen>$ VBoxManage controlvm "Windows XP" setcredentials "John Doe" "secretpassword" "DOMTEST"</screen>
|
---|
105 |
|
---|
106 | <para>
|
---|
107 | While the VM is running, the credentials can be queried by the
|
---|
108 | &product-name; login modules, GINA or credential provider, using
|
---|
109 | the &product-name; Guest Additions device driver. When Windows
|
---|
110 | is in <emphasis>logged out</emphasis> mode, the login modules
|
---|
111 | will constantly poll for credentials and if they are present, a
|
---|
112 | login will be attempted. After retrieving the credentials, the
|
---|
113 | login modules will erase them so that the above command will
|
---|
114 | have to be repeated for subsequent logins.
|
---|
115 | </para>
|
---|
116 |
|
---|
117 | <para>
|
---|
118 | For security reasons, credentials are not stored in any
|
---|
119 | persistent manner and will be lost when the VM is reset. Also,
|
---|
120 | the credentials are write-only. There is no way to retrieve the
|
---|
121 | credentials from the host side. Credentials can be reset from
|
---|
122 | the host side by setting empty values.
|
---|
123 | </para>
|
---|
124 |
|
---|
125 | <para>
|
---|
126 | Depending on the Windows guest version, the following
|
---|
127 | restrictions apply:
|
---|
128 | </para>
|
---|
129 |
|
---|
130 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
131 |
|
---|
132 | <listitem>
|
---|
133 | <para>
|
---|
134 | For <emphasis role="bold">Windows XP guests.</emphasis> The
|
---|
135 | login subsystem needs to be configured to use the classic
|
---|
136 | login dialog, as the &product-name; GINA module does not
|
---|
137 | support the Windows XP-style welcome dialog.
|
---|
138 | </para>
|
---|
139 | </listitem>
|
---|
140 |
|
---|
141 | <listitem>
|
---|
142 | <para>
|
---|
143 | <emphasis role="bold">Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8,
|
---|
144 | and Windows 10 guests.</emphasis> The login subsystem does
|
---|
145 | not support the so-called Secure Attention Sequence,
|
---|
146 | <literal>Ctrl+Alt+Del</literal>. As a result, the guest's
|
---|
147 | group policy settings need to be changed to not use the
|
---|
148 | Secure Attention Sequence. Also, the user name given is only
|
---|
149 | compared to the true user name, not the user friendly name.
|
---|
150 | This means that when you rename a user, you still have to
|
---|
151 | supply the original user name as Windows never renames user
|
---|
152 | accounts internally.
|
---|
153 | </para>
|
---|
154 | </listitem>
|
---|
155 |
|
---|
156 | <listitem>
|
---|
157 | <para>
|
---|
158 | Automatic login handling of the built-in
|
---|
159 | <emphasis role="bold">Windows Remote Desktop
|
---|
160 | Service</emphasis>, formerly known as Terminal Services, is
|
---|
161 | disabled by default. To enable it, create the following
|
---|
162 | registry key with a <literal>DWORD</literal> value of
|
---|
163 | <literal>1</literal>.
|
---|
164 | </para>
|
---|
165 |
|
---|
166 | <screen>HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Oracle\VirtualBox Guest Additions\AutoLogon</screen>
|
---|
167 | </listitem>
|
---|
168 |
|
---|
169 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
170 |
|
---|
171 | <para>
|
---|
172 | The following command forces &product-name; to keep the
|
---|
173 | credentials after they were read by the guest and on VM reset:
|
---|
174 | </para>
|
---|
175 |
|
---|
176 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata "Windows XP" VBoxInternal/Devices/VMMDev/0/Config/KeepCredentials 1</screen>
|
---|
177 |
|
---|
178 | <para>
|
---|
179 | Note that this is a potential security risk, as a malicious
|
---|
180 | application running on the guest could request this information
|
---|
181 | using the proper interface.
|
---|
182 | </para>
|
---|
183 |
|
---|
184 | </sect2>
|
---|
185 |
|
---|
186 | <sect2 id="autologon_unix">
|
---|
187 |
|
---|
188 | <title>Automated Linux and UNIX Guest Logins</title>
|
---|
189 |
|
---|
190 | <para>
|
---|
191 | &product-name; provides a custom PAM module (Pluggable
|
---|
192 | Authentication Module) which can be used to perform automated
|
---|
193 | guest logins on platforms which support this framework.
|
---|
194 | Virtually all modern Linux and UNIX distributions rely on PAM.
|
---|
195 | </para>
|
---|
196 |
|
---|
197 | <para>
|
---|
198 | For automated logins on Ubuntu, or Ubuntu-derived, distributions
|
---|
199 | using LightDM as the display manager. See
|
---|
200 | <xref linkend="autologon_unix_lightdm" />.
|
---|
201 | </para>
|
---|
202 |
|
---|
203 | <para>
|
---|
204 | The <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> module itself
|
---|
205 | <emphasis>does not</emphasis> do an actual verification of the
|
---|
206 | credentials passed to the guest OS. Instead it relies on other
|
---|
207 | modules such as <filename>pam_unix.so</filename> or
|
---|
208 | <filename>pam_unix2.so</filename> down in the PAM stack to do
|
---|
209 | the actual validation using the credentials retrieved by
|
---|
210 | <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename>. Therefore
|
---|
211 | <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> has to be on top of the
|
---|
212 | authentication PAM service list.
|
---|
213 | </para>
|
---|
214 |
|
---|
215 | <note>
|
---|
216 | <para>
|
---|
217 | The <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> module only supports the
|
---|
218 | <literal>auth</literal> primitive. Other primitives such as
|
---|
219 | <literal>account</literal>, <literal>session</literal>, or
|
---|
220 | <literal>password</literal> are not supported.
|
---|
221 | </para>
|
---|
222 | </note>
|
---|
223 |
|
---|
224 | <para>
|
---|
225 | The <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> module is shipped as part
|
---|
226 | of the Guest Additions but it is not installed and/or activated
|
---|
227 | on the guest OS by default. In order to install it, it has to be
|
---|
228 | copied from
|
---|
229 | <filename>/opt/VBoxGuestAdditions-<replaceable>version</replaceable>/other/</filename>
|
---|
230 | to the security modules directory. This is usually
|
---|
231 | <filename>/lib/security/</filename> on 32-bit Linux guests or
|
---|
232 | <filename>/lib64/security/</filename> on 64-bit Linux guests.
|
---|
233 | Please refer to your guest OS documentation for the correct PAM
|
---|
234 | module directory.
|
---|
235 | </para>
|
---|
236 |
|
---|
237 | <para>
|
---|
238 | For example, to use <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> with a
|
---|
239 | Ubuntu Linux guest OS and the GNOME Desktop Manager (GDM) to log
|
---|
240 | in users automatically with the credentials passed by the host,
|
---|
241 | configure the guest OS as follows:
|
---|
242 | </para>
|
---|
243 |
|
---|
244 | <orderedlist>
|
---|
245 |
|
---|
246 | <listitem>
|
---|
247 | <para>
|
---|
248 | Copy the <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> module to the
|
---|
249 | security modules directory. In this case,
|
---|
250 | <filename>/lib/security</filename>.
|
---|
251 | </para>
|
---|
252 | </listitem>
|
---|
253 |
|
---|
254 | <listitem>
|
---|
255 | <para>
|
---|
256 | Edit the PAM configuration file for GDM, found at
|
---|
257 | <filename>/etc/pam.d/gdm</filename>. Add the line
|
---|
258 | <literal>auth requisite pam_vbox.so</literal> at the top.
|
---|
259 | Additionally, in most Linux distributions there is a file
|
---|
260 | called <filename>/etc/pam.d/common-auth</filename>. This
|
---|
261 | file is included in many other services, like the GDM file
|
---|
262 | mentioned above. There you also have to add the line
|
---|
263 | <literal>auth requisite pam_vbox.so</literal>.
|
---|
264 | </para>
|
---|
265 | </listitem>
|
---|
266 |
|
---|
267 | <listitem>
|
---|
268 | <para>
|
---|
269 | If authentication against the shadow database using
|
---|
270 | <filename>pam_unix.so</filename> or
|
---|
271 | <filename>pam_unix2.so</filename> is desired, the argument
|
---|
272 | <literal>try_first_pass</literal> for
|
---|
273 | <filename>pam_unix.so</filename> or
|
---|
274 | <literal>use_first_pass</literal> for
|
---|
275 | <filename>pam_unix2.so</filename> is needed in order to pass
|
---|
276 | the credentials from the &product-name; module to the shadow
|
---|
277 | database authentication module. For Ubuntu, this needs to be
|
---|
278 | added to <filename>/etc/pam.d/common-auth</filename>, to the
|
---|
279 | end of the line referencing
|
---|
280 | <filename>pam_unix.so</filename>. This argument tells the
|
---|
281 | PAM module to use credentials already present in the stack,
|
---|
282 | such as the ones provided by the &product-name; PAM module.
|
---|
283 | </para>
|
---|
284 | </listitem>
|
---|
285 |
|
---|
286 | </orderedlist>
|
---|
287 |
|
---|
288 | <warning>
|
---|
289 | <para>
|
---|
290 | An incorrectly configured PAM stack can effectively prevent
|
---|
291 | you from logging into your guest system.
|
---|
292 | </para>
|
---|
293 | </warning>
|
---|
294 |
|
---|
295 | <para>
|
---|
296 | To make deployment easier, you can pass the argument
|
---|
297 | <literal>debug</literal> right after the
|
---|
298 | <filename>pam_vbox.so</filename> statement. Debug log output
|
---|
299 | will then be recorded using syslog.
|
---|
300 | </para>
|
---|
301 |
|
---|
302 | <note>
|
---|
303 | <para>
|
---|
304 | By default, <command>pam_vbox</command> does not wait for
|
---|
305 | credentials to arrive from the host. When a login prompt is
|
---|
306 | shown, for example by GDM/KDM or the text console, and
|
---|
307 | <command>pam_vbox</command> does not yet have credentials it
|
---|
308 | does not wait until they arrive. Instead the next module in
|
---|
309 | the PAM stack, depending on the PAM configuration, will have
|
---|
310 | the chance for authentication.
|
---|
311 | </para>
|
---|
312 | </note>
|
---|
313 |
|
---|
314 | <para>
|
---|
315 | <command>pam_vbox</command> supports various guest property
|
---|
316 | parameters that are located in
|
---|
317 | <filename>/VirtualBox/GuestAdd/PAM/</filename>. These parameters
|
---|
318 | allow <command>pam_vbox</command> to wait for credentials to be
|
---|
319 | provided by the host and optionally can show a message while
|
---|
320 | waiting for those. The following guest properties can be set:
|
---|
321 | </para>
|
---|
322 |
|
---|
323 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
324 |
|
---|
325 | <listitem>
|
---|
326 | <para>
|
---|
327 | <literal>CredsWait</literal>: Set to 1 if
|
---|
328 | <command>pam_vbox</command> should start waiting until
|
---|
329 | credentials arrive from the host. Until then no other
|
---|
330 | authentication methods such as manually logging in will be
|
---|
331 | available. If this property is empty or gets deleted no
|
---|
332 | waiting for credentials will be performed and
|
---|
333 | <command>pam_vbox</command> will act like before. This
|
---|
334 | property must be set read-only for the guest
|
---|
335 | (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
336 | </para>
|
---|
337 | </listitem>
|
---|
338 |
|
---|
339 | <listitem>
|
---|
340 | <para>
|
---|
341 | <literal>CredsWaitAbort</literal>: Aborts waiting for
|
---|
342 | credentials when set to any value. Can be set from host and
|
---|
343 | the guest.
|
---|
344 | </para>
|
---|
345 | </listitem>
|
---|
346 |
|
---|
347 | <listitem>
|
---|
348 | <para>
|
---|
349 | <literal>CredsWaitTimeout</literal>: Timeout, in seconds, to
|
---|
350 | let <command>pam_vbox</command> wait for credentials to
|
---|
351 | arrive. When no credentials arrive within this timeout,
|
---|
352 | authentication of <command>pam_vbox</command> will be set to
|
---|
353 | failed and the next PAM module in chain will be asked. If
|
---|
354 | this property is not specified, set to 0 or an invalid
|
---|
355 | value, an infinite timeout will be used. This property must
|
---|
356 | be set read-only for the guest
|
---|
357 | (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
358 | </para>
|
---|
359 | </listitem>
|
---|
360 |
|
---|
361 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
362 |
|
---|
363 | <para>
|
---|
364 | To customize <command>pam_vbox</command> further there are the
|
---|
365 | following guest properties:
|
---|
366 | </para>
|
---|
367 |
|
---|
368 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
369 |
|
---|
370 | <listitem>
|
---|
371 | <para>
|
---|
372 | <literal>CredsMsgWaiting</literal>: Custom message showed
|
---|
373 | while pam_vbox is waiting for credentials from the host.
|
---|
374 | This property must be set read-only for the guest
|
---|
375 | (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
376 | </para>
|
---|
377 | </listitem>
|
---|
378 |
|
---|
379 | <listitem>
|
---|
380 | <para>
|
---|
381 | <literal>CredsMsgWaitTimeout</literal>: Custom message
|
---|
382 | showed when waiting for credentials by
|
---|
383 | <command>pam_vbox</command> has timed out. For example, they
|
---|
384 | did not arrive within time. This property must be set
|
---|
385 | read-only for the guest (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
386 | </para>
|
---|
387 | </listitem>
|
---|
388 |
|
---|
389 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
390 |
|
---|
391 | <note>
|
---|
392 | <para>
|
---|
393 | If a <command>pam_vbox</command> guest property does not have
|
---|
394 | the correct flag set (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>) the
|
---|
395 | property is ignored and, depending on the property, a default
|
---|
396 | value will be used. This can result in pam_vbox not waiting
|
---|
397 | for credentials. Consult the appropriate syslog file for more
|
---|
398 | information and use the <literal>debug</literal> option.
|
---|
399 | </para>
|
---|
400 | </note>
|
---|
401 |
|
---|
402 | <sect3 id="autologon_unix_lightdm">
|
---|
403 |
|
---|
404 | <title>&product-name; Greeter for Ubuntu/LightDM</title>
|
---|
405 |
|
---|
406 | <para>
|
---|
407 | &product-name; comes with a greeter module, named
|
---|
408 | <command>vbox-greeter</command>, that can be used with
|
---|
409 | LightDM. LightDM is the default display manager for Ubuntu
|
---|
410 | Linux and therefore can also be used for automated guest
|
---|
411 | logins.
|
---|
412 | </para>
|
---|
413 |
|
---|
414 | <para>
|
---|
415 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> does not need the
|
---|
416 | <command>pam_vbox</command> module described in
|
---|
417 | <xref linkend="autologon_unix"/>in order to function. It comes
|
---|
418 | with its own authentication mechanism provided by LightDM.
|
---|
419 | However, to provide maximum flexibility both modules can be
|
---|
420 | used together on the same guest.
|
---|
421 | </para>
|
---|
422 |
|
---|
423 | <para>
|
---|
424 | As with the <command>pam_vbox</command> module,
|
---|
425 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> is shipped as part of the
|
---|
426 | Guest Additions but it is not installed or activated on the
|
---|
427 | guest OS by default. To install
|
---|
428 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> automatically upon Guest
|
---|
429 | Additions installation, use the
|
---|
430 | <option>--with-autologon</option> option when starting the
|
---|
431 | <command>VBoxLinuxAdditions.run</command> file:
|
---|
432 | </para>
|
---|
433 |
|
---|
434 | <screen># ./VBoxLinuxAdditions.run -- --with-autologon</screen>
|
---|
435 |
|
---|
436 | <para>
|
---|
437 | For manual or postponed installation, copy the
|
---|
438 | <filename>vbox-greeter.desktop</filename> file from
|
---|
439 | <filename>/opt/VBoxGuestAdditions-<version>/other/</filename>
|
---|
440 | to the <filename>xgreeters</filename> directory, which is
|
---|
441 | usually <filename>/usr/share/xgreeters/</filename>. See your
|
---|
442 | guest OS documentation for the name of the correct LightDM
|
---|
443 | greeter directory.
|
---|
444 | </para>
|
---|
445 |
|
---|
446 | <para>
|
---|
447 | The <command>vbox-greeter</command> module is installed by the
|
---|
448 | &product-name; Guest Additions installer and is located in
|
---|
449 | <filename>/usr/sbin/</filename>. To enable
|
---|
450 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> as the standard greeter
|
---|
451 | module, edit the file
|
---|
452 | <filename>/etc/lightdm/lightdm.conf</filename> as follows:
|
---|
453 | </para>
|
---|
454 |
|
---|
455 | <screen>[SeatDefaults]
|
---|
456 | greeter-session=vbox-greeter</screen>
|
---|
457 |
|
---|
458 | <note>
|
---|
459 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
460 |
|
---|
461 | <listitem>
|
---|
462 | <para>
|
---|
463 | The LightDM server must be fully restarted in order for
|
---|
464 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> to be used as the
|
---|
465 | default greeter. As <literal>root</literal> on Ubuntu,
|
---|
466 | run <command>service lightdm --full-restart</command> or
|
---|
467 | restart the guest.
|
---|
468 | </para>
|
---|
469 | </listitem>
|
---|
470 |
|
---|
471 | <listitem>
|
---|
472 | <para>
|
---|
473 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> is independent of the
|
---|
474 | graphical session you choose, such as Gnome, KDE, or
|
---|
475 | Unity. However, <command>vbox-greeter</command> does
|
---|
476 | require FLTK 1.3 or later to implement its own user
|
---|
477 | interface.
|
---|
478 | </para>
|
---|
479 | </listitem>
|
---|
480 |
|
---|
481 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
482 | </note>
|
---|
483 |
|
---|
484 | <para>
|
---|
485 | There are numerous guest properties which can be used to
|
---|
486 | further customize the login experience. For automatically
|
---|
487 | logging in users, the same guest properties apply as for
|
---|
488 | <command>pam_vbox</command>. See
|
---|
489 | <xref linkend="autologon_unix" />.
|
---|
490 | </para>
|
---|
491 |
|
---|
492 | <para>
|
---|
493 | In addition to the previously mentioned guest properties,
|
---|
494 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> enables you to further
|
---|
495 | customize its user interface. The following guest properties
|
---|
496 | are located in the
|
---|
497 | <filename>/VirtualBox/GuestAdd/Greeter/</filename> directory:
|
---|
498 | </para>
|
---|
499 |
|
---|
500 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
501 |
|
---|
502 | <listitem>
|
---|
503 | <para>
|
---|
504 | <literal>HideRestart</literal>: Set to 1 if
|
---|
505 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> should hide the button to
|
---|
506 | restart the guest. This property must be set read-only for
|
---|
507 | the guest (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
508 | </para>
|
---|
509 | </listitem>
|
---|
510 |
|
---|
511 | <listitem>
|
---|
512 | <para>
|
---|
513 | <literal>HideShutdown</literal>: Set to 1 if
|
---|
514 | <command>vbox-greeter</command> should hide the button to
|
---|
515 | shutdown the guest. This property must be set read-only
|
---|
516 | for the guest (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
517 | </para>
|
---|
518 | </listitem>
|
---|
519 |
|
---|
520 | <listitem>
|
---|
521 | <para>
|
---|
522 | <literal>BannerPath</literal>: Path to a
|
---|
523 | <filename>.PNG</filename> file to use as a banner image on
|
---|
524 | the top of the greeter. The image size must be 460 x 90
|
---|
525 | pixels, any bit depth. This property must be set read-only
|
---|
526 | for the guest (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
527 | </para>
|
---|
528 | </listitem>
|
---|
529 |
|
---|
530 | <listitem>
|
---|
531 | <para>
|
---|
532 | <literal>UseTheming</literal>: Set to 1 for turning on the
|
---|
533 | following theming options. This property must be set
|
---|
534 | read-only for the guest (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
535 | </para>
|
---|
536 | </listitem>
|
---|
537 |
|
---|
538 | <listitem>
|
---|
539 | <para>
|
---|
540 | <literal>Theme/BackgroundColor</literal>: Hexadecimal
|
---|
541 | RRGGBB color for the background. This property must be set
|
---|
542 | read-only for the guest (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
543 | </para>
|
---|
544 | </listitem>
|
---|
545 |
|
---|
546 | <listitem>
|
---|
547 | <para>
|
---|
548 | <literal>Theme/LogonDialog/HeaderColor</literal>:
|
---|
549 | Hexadecimal RRGGBB foreground color for the header text.
|
---|
550 | This property must be set read-only for the guest
|
---|
551 | (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
552 | </para>
|
---|
553 | </listitem>
|
---|
554 |
|
---|
555 | <listitem>
|
---|
556 | <para>
|
---|
557 | <literal>Theme/LogonDialog/BackgroundColor</literal>:
|
---|
558 | Hexadecimal RRGGBB color for the login dialog background.
|
---|
559 | This property must be set read-only for the guest
|
---|
560 | (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
561 | </para>
|
---|
562 | </listitem>
|
---|
563 |
|
---|
564 | <listitem>
|
---|
565 | <para>
|
---|
566 | <literal>Theme/LogonDialog/ButtonColor</literal>:
|
---|
567 | Hexadecimal RRGGBB background color for the login dialog
|
---|
568 | button. This property must be set read-only for the guest
|
---|
569 | (<literal>RDONLYGUEST</literal>).
|
---|
570 | </para>
|
---|
571 | </listitem>
|
---|
572 |
|
---|
573 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
574 |
|
---|
575 | <note>
|
---|
576 | <para>
|
---|
577 | The same restrictions for the guest properties above apply
|
---|
578 | as for the ones specified in the <literal>pam_vbox</literal>
|
---|
579 | section.
|
---|
580 | </para>
|
---|
581 | </note>
|
---|
582 |
|
---|
583 | </sect3>
|
---|
584 |
|
---|
585 | </sect2>
|
---|
586 |
|
---|
587 | </sect1>
|
---|
588 |
|
---|
589 | <sect1 id="adv-config-win-guest">
|
---|
590 |
|
---|
591 | <title>Advanced Configuration for Windows Guests</title>
|
---|
592 |
|
---|
593 | <sect2 id="sysprep">
|
---|
594 |
|
---|
595 | <title>Automated Windows System Preparation</title>
|
---|
596 |
|
---|
597 | <para>
|
---|
598 | Microsoft offers a system preparation tool called Sysprep, to
|
---|
599 | prepare a Windows system for deployment or redistribution. Some
|
---|
600 | Windows releases include Sysprep on the installation medium, but
|
---|
601 | the tool is also available for download from the Microsoft web
|
---|
602 | site. In a standard For most Windows versions, Sysprep is
|
---|
603 | included in a default installation. Sysprep mainly consists of
|
---|
604 | an executable called <command>sysprep.exe</command> which is
|
---|
605 | invoked by the user to put the Windows installation into
|
---|
606 | preparation mode.
|
---|
607 | </para>
|
---|
608 |
|
---|
609 | <para>
|
---|
610 | The Guest Additions offer a way to launch a system preparation
|
---|
611 | on the guest operating system in an automated way, controlled
|
---|
612 | from the host system. See
|
---|
613 | <xref linkend="guestadd-guestcontrol" /> for details of how to
|
---|
614 | use this feature with the special identifier
|
---|
615 | <literal>sysprep</literal> as the program to execute, along with
|
---|
616 | the user name <literal>sysprep</literal> and password
|
---|
617 | <literal>sysprep</literal> for the credentials. Sysprep is then
|
---|
618 | started with the required system rights.
|
---|
619 | </para>
|
---|
620 |
|
---|
621 | <note>
|
---|
622 | <para>
|
---|
623 | Specifying the location of <command>sysprep.exe</command> is
|
---|
624 | <emphasis role="bold">not possible</emphasis>. Instead the
|
---|
625 | following paths are used, based on the Windows release:
|
---|
626 | </para>
|
---|
627 |
|
---|
628 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
629 |
|
---|
630 | <listitem>
|
---|
631 | <para>
|
---|
632 | <filename>C:\sysprep\sysprep.exe</filename> for Windows XP
|
---|
633 | and earlier
|
---|
634 | </para>
|
---|
635 | </listitem>
|
---|
636 |
|
---|
637 | <listitem>
|
---|
638 | <para>
|
---|
639 | <filename>%WINDIR%\System32\sysprep\sysprep.exe</filename>
|
---|
640 | for Windows Vista and later
|
---|
641 | </para>
|
---|
642 | </listitem>
|
---|
643 |
|
---|
644 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
645 |
|
---|
646 | <para>
|
---|
647 | The Guest Additions will automatically use the appropriate
|
---|
648 | path to execute the system preparation tool.
|
---|
649 | </para>
|
---|
650 | </note>
|
---|
651 |
|
---|
652 | </sect2>
|
---|
653 |
|
---|
654 | </sect1>
|
---|
655 |
|
---|
656 | <sect1 id="adv-config-linux-guest">
|
---|
657 |
|
---|
658 | <title>Advanced Configuration for Linux and Oracle Solaris Guests</title>
|
---|
659 |
|
---|
660 | <sect2 id="linux-guest-manual-setup">
|
---|
661 |
|
---|
662 | <title>Manual Setup of Selected Guest Services on Linux</title>
|
---|
663 |
|
---|
664 | <para>
|
---|
665 | The &product-name; Guest Additions contain several different
|
---|
666 | drivers. If you do not want to configure them all, use the
|
---|
667 | following command to install the Guest Additions:
|
---|
668 | </para>
|
---|
669 |
|
---|
670 | <screen>$ sh ./VBoxLinuxAdditions.run no_setup</screen>
|
---|
671 |
|
---|
672 | <para>
|
---|
673 | After running this script, run the <command>rcvboxadd
|
---|
674 | setup</command> command as <literal>root</literal> to compile
|
---|
675 | the kernel modules.
|
---|
676 | </para>
|
---|
677 |
|
---|
678 | <para>
|
---|
679 | On some 64-bit guests, you must replace <filename>lib</filename>
|
---|
680 | with <filename>lib64</filename>. On older guests that do not run
|
---|
681 | the <command>udev</command> service, you must add the
|
---|
682 | <command>vboxadd</command> service to the default runlevel to
|
---|
683 | ensure that the modules are loaded.
|
---|
684 | </para>
|
---|
685 |
|
---|
686 | <para>
|
---|
687 | To set up the time synchronization service, add the
|
---|
688 | <command>vboxadd-service</command> service to the default
|
---|
689 | runlevel. To set up the X11 and OpenGL part of the Guest
|
---|
690 | Additions, run the <command>rcvboxadd-x11 setup</command>
|
---|
691 | command. Note that you do not need to enable additional
|
---|
692 | services.
|
---|
693 | </para>
|
---|
694 |
|
---|
695 | <para>
|
---|
696 | Use the <command>rcvboxadd setup</command> to recompile the
|
---|
697 | guest kernel modules.
|
---|
698 | </para>
|
---|
699 |
|
---|
700 | <para>
|
---|
701 | After compilation, reboot your guest to ensure that the new
|
---|
702 | modules are loaded.
|
---|
703 | </para>
|
---|
704 |
|
---|
705 | </sect2>
|
---|
706 |
|
---|
707 | <sect2 id="guestxorgsetup">
|
---|
708 |
|
---|
709 | <title>Guest Graphics and Mouse Driver Setup in Depth</title>
|
---|
710 |
|
---|
711 | <para>
|
---|
712 | This section assumes that you are familiar with configuring the
|
---|
713 | X.Org server using xorg.conf and optionally the newer mechanisms
|
---|
714 | using hal or udev and xorg.conf.d. If not you can learn about
|
---|
715 | them by studying the documentation which comes with X.Org.
|
---|
716 | </para>
|
---|
717 |
|
---|
718 | <para>
|
---|
719 | The &product-name; Guest Additions includes drivers for X.Org.
|
---|
720 | By default these drivers are in the following directory:
|
---|
721 | </para>
|
---|
722 |
|
---|
723 | <para>
|
---|
724 | <filename>/opt/VBoxGuestAdditions-<replaceable>version</replaceable>/other/</filename>
|
---|
725 | </para>
|
---|
726 |
|
---|
727 | <para>
|
---|
728 | The correct versions for the X server are symbolically linked
|
---|
729 | into the X.Org driver directories.
|
---|
730 | </para>
|
---|
731 |
|
---|
732 | <para>
|
---|
733 | For graphics integration to work correctly, the X server must
|
---|
734 | load the <literal>vboxvideo</literal> driver. Many recent X
|
---|
735 | server versions look for it automatically if they see that they
|
---|
736 | are running in &product-name;. For an optimal user experience,
|
---|
737 | the guest kernel drivers must be loaded and the Guest Additions
|
---|
738 | tool <command>VBoxClient</command> must be running as a client
|
---|
739 | in the X session.
|
---|
740 | </para>
|
---|
741 |
|
---|
742 | <para>
|
---|
743 | For mouse integration to work correctly, the guest kernel
|
---|
744 | drivers must be loaded. In addition, for legacy X servers the
|
---|
745 | correct <literal>vboxmouse</literal> driver must be loaded and
|
---|
746 | associated with <filename>/dev/mouse</filename> or
|
---|
747 | <filename>/dev/psaux</filename>. For most guests, a driver for a
|
---|
748 | PS/2 mouse must be loaded and the correct vboxmouse driver must
|
---|
749 | be associated with <filename>/dev/vboxguest</filename>.
|
---|
750 | </para>
|
---|
751 |
|
---|
752 | <para>
|
---|
753 | The &product-name; guest graphics driver can use any graphics
|
---|
754 | configuration for which the virtual resolution fits into the
|
---|
755 | virtual video memory allocated to the virtual machine, minus a
|
---|
756 | small amount used by the guest driver, as described in
|
---|
757 | <xref linkend="settings-display" />. The driver will offer a
|
---|
758 | range of standard modes at least up to the default guest
|
---|
759 | resolution for all active guest monitors. The default mode can
|
---|
760 | be changed by setting the output property VBOX_MODE to
|
---|
761 | "<width>x<height>" for any guest monitor. When
|
---|
762 | VBoxClient and the kernel drivers are active this is done
|
---|
763 | automatically when the host requests a mode change. The driver
|
---|
764 | for older versions can only receive new modes by querying the
|
---|
765 | host for requests at regular intervals.
|
---|
766 | </para>
|
---|
767 |
|
---|
768 | <para>
|
---|
769 | With legacy X Servers before version 1.3, you can also add your
|
---|
770 | own modes to the X server configuration file. Add them to the
|
---|
771 | "Modes" list in the "Display" subsection of the "Screen"
|
---|
772 | section. For example, the following section has a custom
|
---|
773 | 2048x800 resolution mode added:
|
---|
774 | </para>
|
---|
775 |
|
---|
776 | <screen>Section "Screen"
|
---|
777 | Identifier "Default Screen"
|
---|
778 | Device "VirtualBox graphics card"
|
---|
779 | Monitor "Generic Monitor"
|
---|
780 | DefaultDepth 24
|
---|
781 | SubSection "Display"
|
---|
782 | Depth 24
|
---|
783 | Modes "2048x800" "800x600" "640x480"
|
---|
784 | EndSubSection
|
---|
785 | EndSection</screen>
|
---|
786 |
|
---|
787 | </sect2>
|
---|
788 |
|
---|
789 | </sect1>
|
---|
790 |
|
---|
791 | <sect1 id="cpuhotplug">
|
---|
792 |
|
---|
793 | <title>CPU Hot-Plugging</title>
|
---|
794 |
|
---|
795 | <para>
|
---|
796 | With virtual machines running modern server operating systems,
|
---|
797 | &product-name; supports CPU hot-plugging.
|
---|
798 | </para>
|
---|
799 |
|
---|
800 | <para>
|
---|
801 | On a physical computer CPU hot-plugging would mean that a CPU can
|
---|
802 | be added or removed while the machine is running. &product-name;
|
---|
803 | supports adding and removing of virtual CPUs while a virtual
|
---|
804 | machine is running.
|
---|
805 | </para>
|
---|
806 |
|
---|
807 | <para>
|
---|
808 | CPU hot-plugging works only with guest operating systems that
|
---|
809 | support the feature. So far this applies only to Linux and Windows
|
---|
810 | Server. Windows supports only hot-add, while Linux supports
|
---|
811 | hot-add and hot-remove. To use this feature with more than 8 CPUs,
|
---|
812 | a 64-bit Linux guest is required.
|
---|
813 | </para>
|
---|
814 |
|
---|
815 | <para>
|
---|
816 | CPU hot-plugging is done using the <command>VBoxManage</command>
|
---|
817 | command-line interface. First, hot-plugging needs to be enabled
|
---|
818 | for a virtual machine:
|
---|
819 | </para>
|
---|
820 |
|
---|
821 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --cpuhotplug on</screen>
|
---|
822 |
|
---|
823 | <para>
|
---|
824 | The <option>--cpus</option> option is used to specify the maximum
|
---|
825 | number of CPUs that the virtual machine can have:
|
---|
826 | </para>
|
---|
827 |
|
---|
828 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --cpus 8</screen>
|
---|
829 |
|
---|
830 | <para>
|
---|
831 | When the VM is off, you can then add and remove virtual CPUs with
|
---|
832 | the <command>VBoxManage modifyvm --plugcpu</command> and
|
---|
833 | <command>VBoxManage modifyvm --unplugcpu</command> commands, which
|
---|
834 | take the number of the virtual CPU as a parameter, as follows:
|
---|
835 | </para>
|
---|
836 |
|
---|
837 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --plugcpu 3
|
---|
838 | $ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --unplugcpu 3</screen>
|
---|
839 |
|
---|
840 | <para>
|
---|
841 | Note that CPU 0 can never be removed.
|
---|
842 | </para>
|
---|
843 |
|
---|
844 | <para>
|
---|
845 | While the VM is running, CPUs can be added and removed with the
|
---|
846 | <command>VBoxManage controlvm plugcpu</command> and
|
---|
847 | <command>VBoxManage controlvm unplugcpu</command> commands
|
---|
848 | instead, as follows:
|
---|
849 | </para>
|
---|
850 |
|
---|
851 | <screen>$ VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> plugcpu 3
|
---|
852 | $ VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> unplugcpu 3</screen>
|
---|
853 |
|
---|
854 | <para>
|
---|
855 | See <xref linkend="vboxmanage-modifyvm" /> and
|
---|
856 | <xref linkend="vboxmanage-controlvm" /> for details.
|
---|
857 | </para>
|
---|
858 |
|
---|
859 | <para>
|
---|
860 | With Linux guests, the following applies:
|
---|
861 | </para>
|
---|
862 |
|
---|
863 | <para>
|
---|
864 | To prevent ejection while the CPU is still used it has to be
|
---|
865 | ejected from within the guest before. The Linux Guest Additions
|
---|
866 | contain a service which receives hot-remove events and ejects the
|
---|
867 | CPU. Also, after a CPU is added to the VM it is not automatically
|
---|
868 | used by Linux. The Linux Guest Additions service will take care of
|
---|
869 | that if installed. If not a CPU can be started with the following
|
---|
870 | command:
|
---|
871 | </para>
|
---|
872 |
|
---|
873 | <screen>$ echo 1 > /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu<id>/online</screen>
|
---|
874 |
|
---|
875 | </sect1>
|
---|
876 |
|
---|
877 | <!--<sect1 id="pcipassthrough">
|
---|
878 |
|
---|
879 | <title>PCI Passthrough</title>
|
---|
880 |
|
---|
881 | <para>
|
---|
882 | When running on Linux hosts with a kernel version later than
|
---|
883 | <literal>2.6.31</literal>, experimental host PCI devices
|
---|
884 | passthrough is available.
|
---|
885 | </para>
|
---|
886 |
|
---|
887 | <note>
|
---|
888 | <para>
|
---|
889 | The PCI passthrough module is shipped as an &product-name;
|
---|
890 | extension package, which must be installed separately. See
|
---|
891 | <xref linkend="intro-installing" />.
|
---|
892 | </para>
|
---|
893 | </note>
|
---|
894 |
|
---|
895 | <para>
|
---|
896 | This feature enables a guest to directly use physical PCI devices
|
---|
897 | on the host, even if host does not have drivers for this
|
---|
898 | particular device. Both, regular PCI and some PCI Express cards,
|
---|
899 | are supported. AGP and certain PCI Express cards are not supported
|
---|
900 | at the moment if they rely on Graphics Address Remapping Table
|
---|
901 | (GART) unit programming for texture management as it does rather
|
---|
902 | non-trivial operations with pages remapping interfering with
|
---|
903 | IOMMU. This limitation may be lifted in future releases.
|
---|
904 | </para>
|
---|
905 |
|
---|
906 | <para>
|
---|
907 | To be fully functional, PCI passthrough support in &product-name;
|
---|
908 | depends upon an IOMMU hardware unit. If the device uses bus
|
---|
909 | mastering, for example it performs DMA to the OS memory on its
|
---|
910 | own, then an IOMMU is required. Otherwise such DMA transactions
|
---|
911 | may write to the wrong physical memory address as the device DMA
|
---|
912 | engine is programmed using a device-specific protocol to perform
|
---|
913 | memory transactions. The IOMMU functions as translation unit
|
---|
914 | mapping physical memory access requests from the device using
|
---|
915 | knowledge of the guest physical address to host physical addresses
|
---|
916 | translation rules.
|
---|
917 | </para>
|
---|
918 |
|
---|
919 | <para>
|
---|
920 | Intel's solution for IOMMU is called Intel Virtualization
|
---|
921 | Technology for Directed I/O (VT-d), and AMD's solution is called
|
---|
922 | AMD-Vi. Check your motherboard datasheet for the appropriate
|
---|
923 | technology. Even if your hardware does not have a IOMMU, certain
|
---|
924 | PCI cards may work, such as serial PCI adapters, but the guest
|
---|
925 | will show a warning on boot and the VM execution will terminate if
|
---|
926 | the guest driver will attempt to enable card bus mastering.
|
---|
927 | </para>
|
---|
928 |
|
---|
929 | <para>
|
---|
930 | It is very common that the BIOS or the host OS disables the IOMMU
|
---|
931 | by default. So before any attempt to use it please make sure that
|
---|
932 | the following apply:
|
---|
933 | </para>
|
---|
934 |
|
---|
935 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
936 |
|
---|
937 | <listitem>
|
---|
938 | <para>
|
---|
939 | Your motherboard has an IOMMU unit.
|
---|
940 | </para>
|
---|
941 | </listitem>
|
---|
942 |
|
---|
943 | <listitem>
|
---|
944 | <para>
|
---|
945 | Your CPU supports the IOMMU.
|
---|
946 | </para>
|
---|
947 | </listitem>
|
---|
948 |
|
---|
949 | <listitem>
|
---|
950 | <para>
|
---|
951 | The IOMMU is enabled in the BIOS.
|
---|
952 | </para>
|
---|
953 | </listitem>
|
---|
954 |
|
---|
955 | <listitem>
|
---|
956 | <para>
|
---|
957 | The VM must run with VT-x/AMD-V and nested paging enabled.
|
---|
958 | </para>
|
---|
959 | </listitem>
|
---|
960 |
|
---|
961 | <listitem>
|
---|
962 | <para>
|
---|
963 | Your Linux kernel was compiled with IOMMU support, including
|
---|
964 | DMA remapping. See the <literal>CONFIG_DMAR</literal> kernel
|
---|
965 | compilation option. The PCI stub driver
|
---|
966 | (<literal>CONFIG_PCI_STUB</literal>) is required as well.
|
---|
967 | </para>
|
---|
968 | </listitem>
|
---|
969 |
|
---|
970 | <listitem>
|
---|
971 | <para>
|
---|
972 | Your Linux kernel recognizes and uses the IOMMU unit. The
|
---|
973 | <literal>intel_iommu=on</literal> boot option could be needed.
|
---|
974 | Search for DMAR and PCI-DMA in kernel boot log.
|
---|
975 | </para>
|
---|
976 | </listitem>
|
---|
977 |
|
---|
978 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
979 |
|
---|
980 | <para>
|
---|
981 | Once you made sure that the host kernel supports the IOMMU, the
|
---|
982 | next step is to select the PCI card and attach it to the guest. To
|
---|
983 | figure out the list of available PCI devices, use the
|
---|
984 | <command>lspci</command> command. The output will look as follows:
|
---|
985 | </para>
|
---|
986 |
|
---|
987 | <screen>01:00.0 VGA compatible controller: ATI Technologies Inc Cedar PRO [Radeon HD 5450]
|
---|
988 | 01:00.1 Audio device: ATI Technologies Inc Manhattan HDMI Audio [Mobility Radeon HD 5000 Series]
|
---|
989 | 02:00.0 Ethernet controller: Realtek Semiconductor Co., Ltd. RTL8111/8168B PCI Express Gigabit
|
---|
990 | Ethernet controller (rev 03)
|
---|
991 | 03:00.0 SATA controller: JMicron Technology Corp. JMB362/JMB363 Serial ATA Controller (rev 03)
|
---|
992 | 03:00.1 IDE interface: JMicron Technology Corp. JMB362/JMB363 Serial ATA Controller (rev 03)
|
---|
993 | 06:00.0 VGA compatible controller: nVidia Corporation G86 [GeForce 8500 GT] (rev a1)</screen>
|
---|
994 |
|
---|
995 | <para>
|
---|
996 | The first column is a PCI address, in the format
|
---|
997 | <literal><replaceable>bus</replaceable>:<replaceable>device</replaceable>.<replaceable>function</replaceable></literal>.
|
---|
998 | This address could be used to identify the device for further
|
---|
999 | operations. For example, to attach a PCI network controller on the
|
---|
1000 | system listed above to the second PCI bus in the guest, as device
|
---|
1001 | 5, function 0, use the following command:
|
---|
1002 | </para>
|
---|
1003 |
|
---|
1004 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> -\-pciattach 02:00.0@01:05.0</screen>
|
---|
1005 |
|
---|
1006 | <para>
|
---|
1007 | To detach the same device, use:
|
---|
1008 | </para>
|
---|
1009 |
|
---|
1010 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> -\-pcidetach 02:00.0</screen>
|
---|
1011 |
|
---|
1012 | <para>
|
---|
1013 | Please note that both host and guest could freely assign a
|
---|
1014 | different PCI address to the card attached during runtime, so
|
---|
1015 | those addresses only apply to the address of the card at the
|
---|
1016 | moment of attachment on the host, and during BIOS PCI init on the
|
---|
1017 | guest.
|
---|
1018 | </para>
|
---|
1019 |
|
---|
1020 | <para>
|
---|
1021 | If the virtual machine has a PCI device attached, certain
|
---|
1022 | limitations apply:
|
---|
1023 | </para>
|
---|
1024 |
|
---|
1025 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
1026 |
|
---|
1027 | <listitem>
|
---|
1028 | <para>
|
---|
1029 | Only PCI cards with non-shared interrupts, such as those using
|
---|
1030 | MSI on the host, are supported at the moment.
|
---|
1031 | </para>
|
---|
1032 | </listitem>
|
---|
1033 |
|
---|
1034 | <listitem>
|
---|
1035 | <para>
|
---|
1036 | No guest state can be reliably saved or restored. The internal
|
---|
1037 | state of the PCI card cannot be retrieved.
|
---|
1038 | </para>
|
---|
1039 | </listitem>
|
---|
1040 |
|
---|
1041 | <listitem>
|
---|
1042 | <para>
|
---|
1043 | Teleportation, also called live migration, does not work. The
|
---|
1044 | internal state of the PCI card cannot be retrieved.
|
---|
1045 | </para>
|
---|
1046 | </listitem>
|
---|
1047 |
|
---|
1048 | <listitem>
|
---|
1049 | <para>
|
---|
1050 | No lazy physical memory allocation. The host will preallocate
|
---|
1051 | the whole RAM required for the VM on startup, as we cannot
|
---|
1052 | catch physical hardware accesses to the physical memory.
|
---|
1053 | </para>
|
---|
1054 | </listitem>
|
---|
1055 |
|
---|
1056 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
1057 |
|
---|
1058 | </sect1>-->
|
---|
1059 |
|
---|
1060 | <sect1 id="webcam-passthrough">
|
---|
1061 |
|
---|
1062 | <title>Webcam Passthrough</title>
|
---|
1063 |
|
---|
1064 | <sect2 id="webcam-using-guest">
|
---|
1065 |
|
---|
1066 | <title>Using a Host Webcam in the Guest</title>
|
---|
1067 |
|
---|
1068 | <para>
|
---|
1069 | &product-name; includes a feature called <emphasis>webcam
|
---|
1070 | passthrough</emphasis>, which enables a guest to use a host
|
---|
1071 | webcam. This complements the general USB passthrough support
|
---|
1072 | which was the typical way of using host webcams in legacy
|
---|
1073 | releases. The webcam passthrough support can handle non-USB
|
---|
1074 | video sources in theory, but this is completely untested.
|
---|
1075 | </para>
|
---|
1076 |
|
---|
1077 | <note>
|
---|
1078 | <para>
|
---|
1079 | The webcam passthrough module is shipped as part of the
|
---|
1080 | &product-name; extension pack, which must be installed
|
---|
1081 | separately. See <xref linkend="intro-installing" />.
|
---|
1082 | </para>
|
---|
1083 | </note>
|
---|
1084 |
|
---|
1085 | <para>
|
---|
1086 | The host webcam can be attached to the VM using the
|
---|
1087 | <emphasis role="bold">Devices</emphasis> menu in the VM menu
|
---|
1088 | bar. The <emphasis role="bold">Webcams</emphasis> menu contains
|
---|
1089 | a list of available video input devices on the host. Clicking on
|
---|
1090 | a webcam name attaches or detaches the corresponding host
|
---|
1091 | device.
|
---|
1092 | </para>
|
---|
1093 |
|
---|
1094 | <para>
|
---|
1095 | The <command>VBoxManage</command> command line tool can be used
|
---|
1096 | to enable webcam passthrough. Please see the host-specific
|
---|
1097 | sections below for additional details. The following commands
|
---|
1098 | are available:
|
---|
1099 | </para>
|
---|
1100 |
|
---|
1101 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
1102 |
|
---|
1103 | <listitem>
|
---|
1104 | <para>
|
---|
1105 | Get a list of host webcams, or other video input devices:
|
---|
1106 | </para>
|
---|
1107 |
|
---|
1108 | <screen>$ VBoxManage list webcams</screen>
|
---|
1109 |
|
---|
1110 | <para>
|
---|
1111 | The output format is as follows:
|
---|
1112 | </para>
|
---|
1113 |
|
---|
1114 | <screen>alias "user friendly name"
|
---|
1115 | host path or identifier</screen>
|
---|
1116 |
|
---|
1117 | <para>
|
---|
1118 | The alias can be used as a shortcut in other commands. Alias
|
---|
1119 | '.0' means the default video input device on the host. Alias
|
---|
1120 | '.1', '.2'means first, second video input device, and so on.
|
---|
1121 | The device order is host-specific.
|
---|
1122 | </para>
|
---|
1123 | </listitem>
|
---|
1124 |
|
---|
1125 | <listitem>
|
---|
1126 | <para>
|
---|
1127 | Attach a webcam to a running VM, as follows:
|
---|
1128 | </para>
|
---|
1129 |
|
---|
1130 | <screen>VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>VM name</replaceable> webcam attach [<replaceable>host_path</replaceable>|<replaceable>alias</replaceable> [<replaceable>settings</replaceable>]]</screen>
|
---|
1131 |
|
---|
1132 | <para>
|
---|
1133 | This attaches a USB webcam device to the guest.
|
---|
1134 | </para>
|
---|
1135 |
|
---|
1136 | <para>
|
---|
1137 | The <literal>settings</literal> parameter is a string
|
---|
1138 | <literal>Setting1=Value1;Setting2=Value2</literal>, which
|
---|
1139 | enables you to configure the emulated webcam device. The
|
---|
1140 | following settings are supported:
|
---|
1141 | </para>
|
---|
1142 |
|
---|
1143 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
1144 |
|
---|
1145 | <listitem>
|
---|
1146 | <para>
|
---|
1147 | <literal>MaxFramerate</literal>: The highest rate at
|
---|
1148 | which video frames are sent to the guest. A higher frame
|
---|
1149 | rate requires more CPU power. Therefore sometimes it is
|
---|
1150 | useful to set a lower limit. Default is no limit and
|
---|
1151 | allow the guest to use all frame rates supported by the
|
---|
1152 | host webcam.
|
---|
1153 | </para>
|
---|
1154 | </listitem>
|
---|
1155 |
|
---|
1156 | <listitem>
|
---|
1157 | <para>
|
---|
1158 | <literal>MaxPayloadTransferSize</literal>: How many
|
---|
1159 | bytes the emulated webcam can send to the guest at a
|
---|
1160 | time. Default value is 3060 bytes, which is used by some
|
---|
1161 | webcams. Higher values can slightly reduce CPU load, if
|
---|
1162 | the guest is able to use larger buffers. However, a high
|
---|
1163 | <literal>MaxPayloadTransferSize</literal> might be not
|
---|
1164 | supported by some guests.
|
---|
1165 | </para>
|
---|
1166 | </listitem>
|
---|
1167 |
|
---|
1168 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
1169 | </listitem>
|
---|
1170 |
|
---|
1171 | <listitem>
|
---|
1172 | <para>
|
---|
1173 | Detach a webcam from a running VM, as follows:
|
---|
1174 | </para>
|
---|
1175 |
|
---|
1176 | <screen>VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> webcam detach [<replaceable>host_path</replaceable>|<replaceable>alias</replaceable>]</screen>
|
---|
1177 | </listitem>
|
---|
1178 |
|
---|
1179 | <listitem>
|
---|
1180 | <para>
|
---|
1181 | List the webcams attached to a running VM, as follows:
|
---|
1182 | </para>
|
---|
1183 |
|
---|
1184 | <screen>VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> webcam list</screen>
|
---|
1185 |
|
---|
1186 | <para>
|
---|
1187 | The output contains the path or alias which was used in the
|
---|
1188 | <command>webcam attach</command> command for each attached
|
---|
1189 | webcam.
|
---|
1190 | </para>
|
---|
1191 | </listitem>
|
---|
1192 |
|
---|
1193 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
1194 |
|
---|
1195 | </sect2>
|
---|
1196 |
|
---|
1197 | <sect2 id="webcam-win-hosts">
|
---|
1198 |
|
---|
1199 | <title>Windows Hosts</title>
|
---|
1200 |
|
---|
1201 | <para>
|
---|
1202 | When the webcam device is detached from the host, the emulated
|
---|
1203 | webcam device is automatically detached from the guest.
|
---|
1204 | </para>
|
---|
1205 |
|
---|
1206 | </sect2>
|
---|
1207 |
|
---|
1208 | <sect2 id="webcam-mac-hosts">
|
---|
1209 |
|
---|
1210 | <title>Mac OS X Hosts</title>
|
---|
1211 |
|
---|
1212 | <para>
|
---|
1213 | Mac OS X version 10.9 or later is required.
|
---|
1214 | </para>
|
---|
1215 |
|
---|
1216 | <para>
|
---|
1217 | When the webcam device is detached from the host, the emulated
|
---|
1218 | webcam device remains attached to the guest and must be manually
|
---|
1219 | detached using the <command>VBoxManage controlvm
|
---|
1220 | <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> webcam detach</command>
|
---|
1221 | command.
|
---|
1222 | </para>
|
---|
1223 |
|
---|
1224 | </sect2>
|
---|
1225 |
|
---|
1226 | <sect2 id="webcam-linux-hosts">
|
---|
1227 |
|
---|
1228 | <title>Linux and Oracle Solaris Hosts</title>
|
---|
1229 |
|
---|
1230 | <para>
|
---|
1231 | When the webcam is detached from the host the emulated webcam
|
---|
1232 | device is automatically detached from the guest only if the
|
---|
1233 | webcam is streaming video. If the emulated webcam is inactive it
|
---|
1234 | should be manually detached using the <command>VBoxManage
|
---|
1235 | controlvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> webcam
|
---|
1236 | detach</command> command.
|
---|
1237 | </para>
|
---|
1238 |
|
---|
1239 | <para>
|
---|
1240 | Aliases <filename>.0</filename> and <filename>.1</filename> are
|
---|
1241 | mapped to <filename>/dev/video0</filename>, alias
|
---|
1242 | <filename>.2</filename> is mapped to
|
---|
1243 | <filename>/dev/video1</filename> and so forth.
|
---|
1244 | </para>
|
---|
1245 |
|
---|
1246 | </sect2>
|
---|
1247 |
|
---|
1248 | </sect1>
|
---|
1249 |
|
---|
1250 | <sect1 id="adv-display-config">
|
---|
1251 |
|
---|
1252 | <title>Advanced Display Configuration</title>
|
---|
1253 |
|
---|
1254 | <sect2 id="customvesa">
|
---|
1255 |
|
---|
1256 | <title>Custom VESA Resolutions</title>
|
---|
1257 |
|
---|
1258 | <para>
|
---|
1259 | Apart from the standard VESA resolutions, the &product-name;
|
---|
1260 | VESA BIOS enables you to add up to 16 custom video modes which
|
---|
1261 | will be reported to the guest operating system. When using
|
---|
1262 | Windows guests with the &product-name; Guest Additions, a custom
|
---|
1263 | graphics driver will be used instead of the fallback VESA
|
---|
1264 | solution so this information does not apply.
|
---|
1265 | </para>
|
---|
1266 |
|
---|
1267 | <para>
|
---|
1268 | Additional video modes can be configured for each VM using the
|
---|
1269 | extra data facility. The extra data key is called
|
---|
1270 | <literal>CustomVideoMode<replaceable>x</replaceable></literal>
|
---|
1271 | with <replaceable>x</replaceable> being a number from 1 to 16.
|
---|
1272 | Please note that modes will be read from 1 until either the
|
---|
1273 | following number is not defined or 16 is reached. The following
|
---|
1274 | example adds a video mode that corresponds to the native display
|
---|
1275 | resolution of many notebook computers:
|
---|
1276 | </para>
|
---|
1277 |
|
---|
1278 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "CustomVideoMode1" "1400x1050x16"</screen>
|
---|
1279 |
|
---|
1280 | <para>
|
---|
1281 | The VESA mode IDs for custom video modes start at
|
---|
1282 | <literal>0x160</literal>. In order to use the above defined
|
---|
1283 | custom video mode, the following command line has to be supplied
|
---|
1284 | to Linux:
|
---|
1285 | </para>
|
---|
1286 |
|
---|
1287 | <screen>vga = 0x200 | 0x160
|
---|
1288 | vga = 864</screen>
|
---|
1289 |
|
---|
1290 | <para>
|
---|
1291 | For guest operating systems with &product-name; Guest Additions,
|
---|
1292 | a custom video mode can be set using the video mode hint
|
---|
1293 | feature.
|
---|
1294 | </para>
|
---|
1295 |
|
---|
1296 | </sect2>
|
---|
1297 |
|
---|
1298 | <sect2 id="max-resolution-guests">
|
---|
1299 |
|
---|
1300 | <title>Configuring the Maximum Resolution of Guests When Using the Graphical
|
---|
1301 | Frontend</title>
|
---|
1302 |
|
---|
1303 | <para>
|
---|
1304 | When guest systems with the Guest Additions installed are
|
---|
1305 | started using the graphical frontend, the normal &product-name;
|
---|
1306 | application, they will not be allowed to use screen resolutions
|
---|
1307 | greater than the host's screen size unless the user manually
|
---|
1308 | resizes them by dragging the window, switching to full screen or
|
---|
1309 | seamless mode or sending a video mode hint using
|
---|
1310 | <command>VBoxManage</command>. This behavior is what most users
|
---|
1311 | will want, but if you have different needs, you can change it by
|
---|
1312 | issuing one of the following commands from the command line:
|
---|
1313 | </para>
|
---|
1314 |
|
---|
1315 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
1316 |
|
---|
1317 | <listitem>
|
---|
1318 | <para>
|
---|
1319 | Remove all limits on guest resolutions.
|
---|
1320 | </para>
|
---|
1321 |
|
---|
1322 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/MaxGuestResolution any</screen>
|
---|
1323 | </listitem>
|
---|
1324 |
|
---|
1325 | <listitem>
|
---|
1326 | <para>
|
---|
1327 | Manually specify a maximum resolution.
|
---|
1328 | </para>
|
---|
1329 |
|
---|
1330 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/MaxGuestResolution <replaceable>width</replaceable>x<replaceable>height</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
1331 | </listitem>
|
---|
1332 |
|
---|
1333 | <listitem>
|
---|
1334 | <para>
|
---|
1335 | Restore the default settings to all guest VMs.
|
---|
1336 | </para>
|
---|
1337 |
|
---|
1338 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/MaxGuestResolution auto</screen>
|
---|
1339 | </listitem>
|
---|
1340 |
|
---|
1341 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
1342 |
|
---|
1343 | </sect2>
|
---|
1344 |
|
---|
1345 | </sect1>
|
---|
1346 |
|
---|
1347 | <sect1 id="adv-storage-config">
|
---|
1348 |
|
---|
1349 | <title>Advanced Storage Configuration</title>
|
---|
1350 |
|
---|
1351 | <sect2 id="rawdisk">
|
---|
1352 |
|
---|
1353 | <title>Using a Raw Host Hard Disk From a Guest</title>
|
---|
1354 |
|
---|
1355 | <para>
|
---|
1356 | As an alternative to using virtual disk images as described in
|
---|
1357 | <xref linkend="storage" />, &product-name; can also present
|
---|
1358 | either entire physical hard disks or selected partitions as
|
---|
1359 | virtual disks to virtual machines.
|
---|
1360 | </para>
|
---|
1361 |
|
---|
1362 | <para>
|
---|
1363 | With &product-name;, this type of access is called <emphasis>raw
|
---|
1364 | hard disk access</emphasis>. It enables a guest operating system
|
---|
1365 | to access its virtual hard disk without going through the host
|
---|
1366 | OS file system. The actual performance difference for image
|
---|
1367 | files compared to raw disk varies greatly depending on the
|
---|
1368 | overhead of the host file system, whether dynamically growing
|
---|
1369 | images are used, and on host OS caching strategies. The caching
|
---|
1370 | indirectly also affects other aspects such as failure behavior.
|
---|
1371 | For example, whether the virtual disk contains all data written
|
---|
1372 | before a host OS crash. Consult your host OS documentation for
|
---|
1373 | details on this.
|
---|
1374 | </para>
|
---|
1375 |
|
---|
1376 | <warning>
|
---|
1377 | <para>
|
---|
1378 | Raw hard disk access is for expert users only. Incorrect use
|
---|
1379 | or use of an outdated configuration can lead to
|
---|
1380 | <emphasis role="bold">total loss of data</emphasis> on the
|
---|
1381 | physical disk. Most importantly, <emphasis>do not</emphasis>
|
---|
1382 | attempt to boot the partition with the currently running host
|
---|
1383 | operating system in a guest. This will lead to severe data
|
---|
1384 | corruption.
|
---|
1385 | </para>
|
---|
1386 | </warning>
|
---|
1387 |
|
---|
1388 | <para>
|
---|
1389 | Raw hard disk access, both for entire disks and individual
|
---|
1390 | partitions, is implemented as part of the VMDK image format
|
---|
1391 | support. As a result, you will need to create a special VMDK
|
---|
1392 | image file which defines where the data will be stored. After
|
---|
1393 | creating such a special VMDK image, you can use it like a
|
---|
1394 | regular virtual disk image. For example, you can use the
|
---|
1395 | VirtualBox Manager, see <xref linkend="vdis" />, or
|
---|
1396 | <command>VBoxManage</command> to assign the image to a virtual
|
---|
1397 | machine.
|
---|
1398 | </para>
|
---|
1399 |
|
---|
1400 | <sect3 id="rawdisk-access-entire-physical-disk">
|
---|
1401 |
|
---|
1402 | <title>Access to Entire Physical Hard Disk</title>
|
---|
1403 |
|
---|
1404 | <para>
|
---|
1405 | While this variant is the simplest to set up, you must be
|
---|
1406 | aware that this will give a guest operating system direct and
|
---|
1407 | full access to an <emphasis>entire physical disk</emphasis>.
|
---|
1408 | If your <emphasis>host</emphasis> operating system is also
|
---|
1409 | booted from this disk, please take special care to not access
|
---|
1410 | the partition from the guest at all. On the positive side, the
|
---|
1411 | physical disk can be repartitioned in arbitrary ways without
|
---|
1412 | having to recreate the image file that gives access to the raw
|
---|
1413 | disk.
|
---|
1414 | </para>
|
---|
1415 |
|
---|
1416 | <para>
|
---|
1417 | On a Linux host, to create an image that represents an entire
|
---|
1418 | physical hard disk which will not contain any actual data, as
|
---|
1419 | this will all be stored on the physical disk, use the
|
---|
1420 | following command:
|
---|
1421 | </para>
|
---|
1422 |
|
---|
1423 | <screen>$ VBoxManage internalcommands createrawvmdk -filename \
|
---|
1424 | /path/to/file.vmdk -rawdisk /dev/sda</screen>
|
---|
1425 |
|
---|
1426 | <para>
|
---|
1427 | This creates the
|
---|
1428 | <filename>/<replaceable>path-to-file</replaceable>.vmdk</filename>
|
---|
1429 | file image that must be an absolute path. All data is read and
|
---|
1430 | written from <filename>/dev/sda</filename>.
|
---|
1431 | </para>
|
---|
1432 |
|
---|
1433 | <para>
|
---|
1434 | On a Windows host, instead of the above device specification,
|
---|
1435 | for example use <filename>\\.\PhysicalDrive0</filename>. On a
|
---|
1436 | Mac OS X host, instead of the above device specification use
|
---|
1437 | for example <filename>/dev/disk1</filename>. Note that on Mac
|
---|
1438 | OS X you can only get access to an entire disk if no volume is
|
---|
1439 | mounted from it.
|
---|
1440 | </para>
|
---|
1441 |
|
---|
1442 | <para>
|
---|
1443 | Creating the image requires read/write access for the given
|
---|
1444 | device. Read/write access is also later needed when using the
|
---|
1445 | image from a virtual machine. On some host platforms, such as
|
---|
1446 | Windows, raw disk access may be restricted and not permitted
|
---|
1447 | by the host OS in some situations.
|
---|
1448 | </para>
|
---|
1449 |
|
---|
1450 | <para>
|
---|
1451 | Just like with regular disk images, this does not
|
---|
1452 | automatically attach the newly created image to a virtual
|
---|
1453 | machine. This can be done as follows:
|
---|
1454 | </para>
|
---|
1455 |
|
---|
1456 | <screen>$ VBoxManage storageattach WindowsXP --storagectl "IDE Controller" \
|
---|
1457 | --port 0 --device 0 --type hdd --medium /path/to/file.vmdk</screen>
|
---|
1458 |
|
---|
1459 | <para>
|
---|
1460 | When this is done the selected virtual machine will boot from
|
---|
1461 | the specified physical disk.
|
---|
1462 | </para>
|
---|
1463 |
|
---|
1464 | </sect3>
|
---|
1465 |
|
---|
1466 | <sect3 id="rawdisk-access-disk-partitions">
|
---|
1467 |
|
---|
1468 | <title>Access to Individual Physical Hard Disk Partitions</title>
|
---|
1469 |
|
---|
1470 | <para>
|
---|
1471 | This <emphasis>raw partition support</emphasis> is quite
|
---|
1472 | similar to the full hard disk access described above. However,
|
---|
1473 | in this case, any partitioning information will be stored
|
---|
1474 | inside the VMDK image. This means that you can install a
|
---|
1475 | different boot loader in the virtual hard disk without
|
---|
1476 | affecting the host's partitioning information. While the guest
|
---|
1477 | will be able to <emphasis>see</emphasis> all partitions that
|
---|
1478 | exist on the physical disk, access will be filtered in that
|
---|
1479 | reading from partitions for which no access is allowed the
|
---|
1480 | partitions will only yield zeroes, and all writes to them are
|
---|
1481 | ignored.
|
---|
1482 | </para>
|
---|
1483 |
|
---|
1484 | <para>
|
---|
1485 | To create a special image for raw partition support, which
|
---|
1486 | will contain a small amount of data, on a Linux host, use the
|
---|
1487 | command:
|
---|
1488 | </para>
|
---|
1489 |
|
---|
1490 | <screen>$ VBoxManage internalcommands createrawvmdk -filename \
|
---|
1491 | /path/to/file.vmdk -rawdisk /dev/sda -partitions 1,5</screen>
|
---|
1492 |
|
---|
1493 | <para>
|
---|
1494 | The command is identical to the one for full hard disk access,
|
---|
1495 | except for the additional <option>-partitions</option>
|
---|
1496 | parameter. This example would create the image
|
---|
1497 | <filename>/<replaceable>path-to-file</replaceable>.vmdk</filename>,
|
---|
1498 | which must be absolute, and partitions 1 and 5 of
|
---|
1499 | <filename>/dev/sda</filename> would be made accessible to the
|
---|
1500 | guest.
|
---|
1501 | </para>
|
---|
1502 |
|
---|
1503 | <para>
|
---|
1504 | &product-name; uses the same partition numbering as your Linux
|
---|
1505 | host. As a result, the numbers given in the above example
|
---|
1506 | would refer to the first primary partition and the first
|
---|
1507 | logical drive in the extended partition, respectively.
|
---|
1508 | </para>
|
---|
1509 |
|
---|
1510 | <para>
|
---|
1511 | On a Windows host, instead of the above device specification,
|
---|
1512 | use for example <filename>\\.\PhysicalDrive0</filename>. On a
|
---|
1513 | Mac OS X host, instead of the above device specification use
|
---|
1514 | <filename>/dev/disk1</filename>, for example. Note that on OS
|
---|
1515 | X you can only use partitions which are not mounted. Eject the
|
---|
1516 | respective volume first. Partition numbers are the same on
|
---|
1517 | Linux, Windows, and Mac OS X hosts.
|
---|
1518 | </para>
|
---|
1519 |
|
---|
1520 | <para>
|
---|
1521 | The numbers for the list of partitions can be taken from the
|
---|
1522 | output of the following command:
|
---|
1523 | </para>
|
---|
1524 |
|
---|
1525 | <screen>$ VBoxManage internalcommands listpartitions -rawdisk /dev/sda</screen>
|
---|
1526 |
|
---|
1527 | <para>
|
---|
1528 | The output lists the partition types and sizes to give the
|
---|
1529 | user enough information to identify the partitions necessary
|
---|
1530 | for the guest.
|
---|
1531 | </para>
|
---|
1532 |
|
---|
1533 | <para>
|
---|
1534 | Images which give access to individual partitions are specific
|
---|
1535 | to a particular host disk setup. You cannot transfer these
|
---|
1536 | images to another host. Also, whenever the host partitioning
|
---|
1537 | changes, the image <emphasis>must be recreated</emphasis>.
|
---|
1538 | </para>
|
---|
1539 |
|
---|
1540 | <para>
|
---|
1541 | Creating the image requires read/write access for the given
|
---|
1542 | device. Read/write access is also later needed when using the
|
---|
1543 | image from a virtual machine. If this is not feasible, there
|
---|
1544 | is a special variant for raw partition access, currently only
|
---|
1545 | available on Linux hosts, that avoids having to give the
|
---|
1546 | current user access to the entire disk. To set up such an
|
---|
1547 | image, use:
|
---|
1548 | </para>
|
---|
1549 |
|
---|
1550 | <screen>$ VBoxManage internalcommands createrawvmdk -filename \
|
---|
1551 | /path/to/file.vmdk -rawdisk /dev/sda -partitions 1,5 -relative</screen>
|
---|
1552 |
|
---|
1553 | <para>
|
---|
1554 | When used from a virtual machine, the image will then refer
|
---|
1555 | not to the entire disk, but only to the individual partitions.
|
---|
1556 | In this example, <filename>/dev/sda1</filename> and
|
---|
1557 | <filename>/dev/sda5</filename>. As a consequence, read/write
|
---|
1558 | access is only required for the affected partitions, not for
|
---|
1559 | the entire disk. During creation however, read-only access to
|
---|
1560 | the entire disk is required to obtain the partitioning
|
---|
1561 | information.
|
---|
1562 | </para>
|
---|
1563 |
|
---|
1564 | <para>
|
---|
1565 | In some configurations it may be necessary to change the MBR
|
---|
1566 | code of the created image. For example, to replace the Linux
|
---|
1567 | boot loader that is used on the host by another boot loader.
|
---|
1568 | This enables for example the guest to boot directly to
|
---|
1569 | Windows, while the host boots Linux from the "same" disk. For
|
---|
1570 | this purpose the <option>-mbr</option> option is provided. It
|
---|
1571 | specifies a file name from which to take the MBR code. The
|
---|
1572 | partition table is not modified at all, so a MBR file from a
|
---|
1573 | system with totally different partitioning can be used. An
|
---|
1574 | example of this is:
|
---|
1575 | </para>
|
---|
1576 |
|
---|
1577 | <screen>$ VBoxManage internalcommands createrawvmdk -filename
|
---|
1578 | /path/to/file.vmdk -rawdisk /dev/sda -partitions 1,5 -mbr winxp.mbr</screen>
|
---|
1579 |
|
---|
1580 | <para>
|
---|
1581 | The modified MBR will be stored inside the image, not on the
|
---|
1582 | host disk.
|
---|
1583 | </para>
|
---|
1584 |
|
---|
1585 | <para>
|
---|
1586 | The created image can be attached to a storage controller in a
|
---|
1587 | VM configuration as usual.
|
---|
1588 | </para>
|
---|
1589 |
|
---|
1590 | </sect3>
|
---|
1591 |
|
---|
1592 | </sect2>
|
---|
1593 |
|
---|
1594 | <sect2 id="changevpd">
|
---|
1595 |
|
---|
1596 | <title>Configuring the Hard Disk Vendor Product Data (VPD)</title>
|
---|
1597 |
|
---|
1598 | <para>
|
---|
1599 | &product-name; reports vendor product data for its virtual hard
|
---|
1600 | disks which consist of hard disk serial number, firmware
|
---|
1601 | revision and model number. These can be changed using the
|
---|
1602 | following commands:
|
---|
1603 | </para>
|
---|
1604 |
|
---|
1605 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1606 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/SerialNumber" "serial"
|
---|
1607 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1608 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/FirmwareRevision" "firmware"
|
---|
1609 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1610 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/ModelNumber" "model"</screen>
|
---|
1611 |
|
---|
1612 | <para>
|
---|
1613 | The serial number is a 20 byte alphanumeric string, the firmware
|
---|
1614 | revision an 8 byte alphanumeric string and the model number a 40
|
---|
1615 | byte alphanumeric string. Instead of Port0, referring to the
|
---|
1616 | first port, specify the desired SATA hard disk port.
|
---|
1617 | </para>
|
---|
1618 |
|
---|
1619 | <para>
|
---|
1620 | The above commands apply to virtual machines with an AHCI (SATA)
|
---|
1621 | controller. The commands for virtual machines with an IDE
|
---|
1622 | controller are:
|
---|
1623 | </para>
|
---|
1624 |
|
---|
1625 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1626 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/piix3ide/0/Config/PrimaryMaster/SerialNumber" "serial"
|
---|
1627 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1628 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/piix3ide/0/Config/PrimaryMaster/FirmwareRevision" "firmware"
|
---|
1629 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1630 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/piix3ide/0/Config/PrimaryMaster/ModelNumber" "model"</screen>
|
---|
1631 |
|
---|
1632 | <para>
|
---|
1633 | For hard disks, you can mark the drive as having a
|
---|
1634 | non-rotational medium by using the following command:
|
---|
1635 | </para>
|
---|
1636 |
|
---|
1637 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1638 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/NonRotational" "1"</screen>
|
---|
1639 |
|
---|
1640 | <para>
|
---|
1641 | Additional three parameters are needed for CD/DVD drives to
|
---|
1642 | report the vendor product data:
|
---|
1643 | </para>
|
---|
1644 |
|
---|
1645 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1646 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/ATAPIVendorId" "vendor"
|
---|
1647 | VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1648 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/ATAPIProductId" "product"
|
---|
1649 | VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1650 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/ahci/0/Config/Port0/ATAPIRevision" "revision"</screen>
|
---|
1651 |
|
---|
1652 | <para>
|
---|
1653 | The vendor id is an 8 byte alphanumeric string, the product id
|
---|
1654 | an 16 byte alphanumeric string and the revision a 4 byte
|
---|
1655 | alphanumeric string. Instead of Port0, referring to the first
|
---|
1656 | port, specify the desired SATA hard disk port.
|
---|
1657 | </para>
|
---|
1658 |
|
---|
1659 | </sect2>
|
---|
1660 |
|
---|
1661 | <sect2 id="iscsi-intnet">
|
---|
1662 |
|
---|
1663 | <title>Access iSCSI Targets Using Internal Networking</title>
|
---|
1664 |
|
---|
1665 | <para>
|
---|
1666 | As an experimental feature, &product-name; enables access to an
|
---|
1667 | iSCSI target running in a virtual machine which is configured to
|
---|
1668 | use Internal Networking mode. See
|
---|
1669 | <xref linkend="storage-iscsi" />,
|
---|
1670 | <xref linkend="network_internal" />, and
|
---|
1671 | <xref
|
---|
1672 | linkend="vboxmanage-storageattach" />.
|
---|
1673 | </para>
|
---|
1674 |
|
---|
1675 | <para>
|
---|
1676 | The IP stack accessing Internal Networking must be configured in
|
---|
1677 | the virtual machine which accesses the iSCSI target. A free
|
---|
1678 | static IP and a MAC address not used by other virtual machines
|
---|
1679 | must be chosen. In the example below, adapt the name of the
|
---|
1680 | virtual machine, the MAC address, the IP configuration, and the
|
---|
1681 | Internal Networking name (MyIntNet) according to your needs. The
|
---|
1682 | following eight commands must first be issued:
|
---|
1683 | </para>
|
---|
1684 |
|
---|
1685 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1686 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/Trusted 1
|
---|
1687 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1688 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/Config/MAC 08:00:27:01:02:0f
|
---|
1689 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1690 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/Config/IP 10.0.9.1
|
---|
1691 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1692 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/Config/Netmask 255.255.255.0
|
---|
1693 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1694 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/LUN#0/Driver IntNet
|
---|
1695 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1696 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/LUN#0/Config/Network MyIntNet
|
---|
1697 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1698 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/LUN#0/Config/TrunkType 2
|
---|
1699 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1700 | VBoxInternal/Devices/IntNetIP/0/LUN#0/Config/IsService 1</screen>
|
---|
1701 |
|
---|
1702 | <para>
|
---|
1703 | Finally the iSCSI disk must be attached with the
|
---|
1704 | <option>--intnet</option> option to tell the iSCSI initiator to
|
---|
1705 | use internal networking, as follows:
|
---|
1706 | </para>
|
---|
1707 |
|
---|
1708 | <screen>$ VBoxManage storageattach ... --medium iscsi --server 10.0.9.30 \
|
---|
1709 | --target iqn.2008-12.com.sun:sampletarget --intnet</screen>
|
---|
1710 |
|
---|
1711 | <para>
|
---|
1712 | Compared to a regular iSCSI setup, the IP address of the target
|
---|
1713 | <emphasis>must</emphasis> be specified as a numeric IP address,
|
---|
1714 | as there is no DNS resolver for internal networking.
|
---|
1715 | </para>
|
---|
1716 |
|
---|
1717 | <para>
|
---|
1718 | The virtual machine with the iSCSI target should be started
|
---|
1719 | before the VM using it is powered on. If a virtual machine using
|
---|
1720 | an iSCSI disk is started without having the iSCSI target powered
|
---|
1721 | up, it can take up to 200 seconds to detect this situation. The
|
---|
1722 | VM will fail to power up.
|
---|
1723 | </para>
|
---|
1724 |
|
---|
1725 | </sect2>
|
---|
1726 |
|
---|
1727 | </sect1>
|
---|
1728 |
|
---|
1729 | <sect1 id="changenat">
|
---|
1730 |
|
---|
1731 | <title>Fine Tuning the &product-name; NAT Engine</title>
|
---|
1732 |
|
---|
1733 | <sect2 id="nat-address-config">
|
---|
1734 |
|
---|
1735 | <title>Configuring the Address of a NAT Network Interface</title>
|
---|
1736 |
|
---|
1737 | <para>
|
---|
1738 | In NAT mode, the guest network interface is assigned to the IPv4
|
---|
1739 | range <literal>10.0.<replaceable>x</replaceable>.0/24</literal>
|
---|
1740 | by default where <replaceable>x</replaceable> corresponds to the
|
---|
1741 | instance of the NAT interface +2. So
|
---|
1742 | <replaceable>x</replaceable> is 2 when there is only one NAT
|
---|
1743 | instance active. In that case the guest is assigned to the
|
---|
1744 | address <literal>10.0.2.15</literal>, the gateway is set to
|
---|
1745 | <literal>10.0.2.2</literal> and the name server can be found at
|
---|
1746 | <literal>10.0.2.3</literal>.
|
---|
1747 | </para>
|
---|
1748 |
|
---|
1749 | <para>
|
---|
1750 | If the NAT network needs to be changed, use the following
|
---|
1751 | command:
|
---|
1752 | </para>
|
---|
1753 |
|
---|
1754 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1755 | --natnet1 "192.168/16"</screen>
|
---|
1756 |
|
---|
1757 | <para>
|
---|
1758 | This command would reserve the network addresses from
|
---|
1759 | <literal>192.168.0.0</literal> to
|
---|
1760 | <literal>192.168.254.254</literal> for the first NAT network
|
---|
1761 | instance of <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> The guest IP
|
---|
1762 | would be assigned to <literal>192.168.0.15</literal> and the
|
---|
1763 | default gateway could be found at
|
---|
1764 | <literal>192.168.0.2</literal>.
|
---|
1765 | </para>
|
---|
1766 |
|
---|
1767 | </sect2>
|
---|
1768 |
|
---|
1769 | <sect2 id="nat-adv-tftp">
|
---|
1770 |
|
---|
1771 | <title>Configuring the Boot Server (Next Server) of a NAT Network Interface</title>
|
---|
1772 |
|
---|
1773 | <para>
|
---|
1774 | For network booting in NAT mode, by default &product-name; uses
|
---|
1775 | a built-in TFTP server at the IP address 10.0.2.4. This default
|
---|
1776 | behavior should work fine for typical remote-booting scenarios.
|
---|
1777 | However, it is possible to change the boot server IP and the
|
---|
1778 | location of the boot image with the following commands:
|
---|
1779 | </para>
|
---|
1780 |
|
---|
1781 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1782 | --nattftpserver1 10.0.2.2
|
---|
1783 | $ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1784 | --nattftpfile1 /srv/tftp/boot/MyPXEBoot.pxe</screen>
|
---|
1785 |
|
---|
1786 | </sect2>
|
---|
1787 |
|
---|
1788 | <sect2 id="nat-adv-settings">
|
---|
1789 |
|
---|
1790 | <title>Tuning TCP/IP Buffers for NAT</title>
|
---|
1791 |
|
---|
1792 | <para>
|
---|
1793 | The &product-name; NAT stack performance is often determined by
|
---|
1794 | its interaction with the host's TCP/IP stack and the size of
|
---|
1795 | several buffers, <literal>SO_RCVBUF</literal> and
|
---|
1796 | <literal>SO_SNDBUF</literal>. For certain setups users might
|
---|
1797 | want to adjust the buffer size for a better performance. This
|
---|
1798 | can by achieved using the following commands, where values are
|
---|
1799 | in kilobytes and can range from 8 to 1024:
|
---|
1800 | </para>
|
---|
1801 |
|
---|
1802 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1803 | --natsettings1 16000,128,128,0,0</screen>
|
---|
1804 |
|
---|
1805 | <para>
|
---|
1806 | This example illustrates tuning the NAT settings. The first
|
---|
1807 | parameter is the MTU, then the size of the socket's send buffer
|
---|
1808 | and the size of the socket's receive buffer, the initial size of
|
---|
1809 | the TCP send window, and lastly the initial size of the TCP
|
---|
1810 | receive window. Note that specifying zero means fallback to the
|
---|
1811 | default value.
|
---|
1812 | </para>
|
---|
1813 |
|
---|
1814 | <para>
|
---|
1815 | Each of these buffers has a default size of 64KB and default MTU
|
---|
1816 | is 1500.
|
---|
1817 | </para>
|
---|
1818 |
|
---|
1819 | </sect2>
|
---|
1820 |
|
---|
1821 | <sect2 id="nat-bind-sockets">
|
---|
1822 |
|
---|
1823 | <title>Binding NAT Sockets to a Specific Interface</title>
|
---|
1824 |
|
---|
1825 | <para>
|
---|
1826 | By default, &product-name;'s NAT engine will route TCP/IP
|
---|
1827 | packets through the default interface assigned by the host's
|
---|
1828 | TCP/IP stack. The technical reason for this is that the NAT
|
---|
1829 | engine uses sockets for communication. If you want to change
|
---|
1830 | this behavior, you can tell the NAT engine to bind to a
|
---|
1831 | particular IP address instead. For example, use the following
|
---|
1832 | command:
|
---|
1833 | </para>
|
---|
1834 |
|
---|
1835 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1836 | --natbindip1 "10.45.0.2"</screen>
|
---|
1837 |
|
---|
1838 | <para>
|
---|
1839 | After this, all outgoing traffic will be sent through the
|
---|
1840 | interface with the IP address 10.45.0.2. Ensure that this
|
---|
1841 | interface is up and running before changing the NAT bind
|
---|
1842 | address.
|
---|
1843 | </para>
|
---|
1844 |
|
---|
1845 | </sect2>
|
---|
1846 |
|
---|
1847 | <sect2 id="nat-adv-dns">
|
---|
1848 |
|
---|
1849 | <title>Enabling DNS Proxy in NAT Mode</title>
|
---|
1850 |
|
---|
1851 | <para>
|
---|
1852 | The NAT engine by default offers the same DNS servers to the
|
---|
1853 | guest that are configured on the host. In some scenarios, it can
|
---|
1854 | be desirable to hide the DNS server IPs from the guest, for
|
---|
1855 | example when this information can change on the host due to
|
---|
1856 | expiring DHCP leases. In this case, you can tell the NAT engine
|
---|
1857 | to act as DNS proxy using the following command:
|
---|
1858 | </para>
|
---|
1859 |
|
---|
1860 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --natdnsproxy1 on</screen>
|
---|
1861 |
|
---|
1862 | </sect2>
|
---|
1863 |
|
---|
1864 | <sect2 id="nat_host_resolver_proxy">
|
---|
1865 |
|
---|
1866 | <title>Using the Host's Resolver as a DNS Proxy in NAT Mode</title>
|
---|
1867 |
|
---|
1868 | <para>
|
---|
1869 | For resolving network names, the DHCP server of the NAT engine
|
---|
1870 | offers a list of registered DNS servers of the host. If for some
|
---|
1871 | reason you need to hide this DNS server list and use the host's
|
---|
1872 | resolver settings, thereby forcing the &product-name; NAT engine
|
---|
1873 | to intercept DNS requests and forward them to host's resolver,
|
---|
1874 | use the following command:
|
---|
1875 | </para>
|
---|
1876 |
|
---|
1877 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --natdnshostresolver1 on</screen>
|
---|
1878 |
|
---|
1879 | <para>
|
---|
1880 | Note that this setting is similar to the DNS proxy mode, however
|
---|
1881 | whereas the proxy mode just forwards DNS requests to the
|
---|
1882 | appropriate servers, the resolver mode will interpret the DNS
|
---|
1883 | requests and use the host's DNS API to query the information and
|
---|
1884 | return it to the guest.
|
---|
1885 | </para>
|
---|
1886 |
|
---|
1887 | <sect3 id="nat_host_resolver_name_intercepting">
|
---|
1888 |
|
---|
1889 | <title>User-Defined Host Name Resolving</title>
|
---|
1890 |
|
---|
1891 | <para>
|
---|
1892 | In some cases it might be useful to intercept the name
|
---|
1893 | resolving mechanism, providing a user-defined IP address on a
|
---|
1894 | particular DNS request. The intercepting mechanism enables the
|
---|
1895 | user to map not only a single host but domains and even more
|
---|
1896 | complex naming conventions if required.
|
---|
1897 | </para>
|
---|
1898 |
|
---|
1899 | <para>
|
---|
1900 | The following command sets a rule for mapping a name to a
|
---|
1901 | specified IP:
|
---|
1902 | </para>
|
---|
1903 |
|
---|
1904 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1905 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/{pcnet,e1000}/0/LUN#0/AttachedDriver/Config/HostResolverMappings/ \
|
---|
1906 | <replaceable>unique-rule-name-of-interception-rule</replaceable>/HostIP" <replaceable>IPv4</replaceable>
|
---|
1907 |
|
---|
1908 | VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1909 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/{pcnet,e1000}/0/LUN#0/AttachedDriver/Config/HostResolverMappings/ \
|
---|
1910 | <replaceable>unique-rule-name</replaceable>/HostName" <replaceable>hostname</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
1911 |
|
---|
1912 | <para>
|
---|
1913 | The following command sets a rule for mapping a pattern name
|
---|
1914 | to a specified IP:
|
---|
1915 | </para>
|
---|
1916 |
|
---|
1917 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1918 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/{pcnet,e1000}/0/LUN#0/AttachedDriver/Config/HostResolverMappings/ \
|
---|
1919 | <replaceable>unique-rule-name</replaceable>/HostIP" <replaceable>IPv4</replaceable>
|
---|
1920 |
|
---|
1921 | VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1922 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/{pcnet,e1000}/0/LUN#0/AttachedDriver/Config/HostResolverMappings/ \
|
---|
1923 | <replaceable>unique-rule-name</replaceable>/HostNamePattern" <replaceable>hostpattern</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
1924 |
|
---|
1925 | <para>
|
---|
1926 | The host name pattern can include the following wildcard
|
---|
1927 | characters: pipe (<literal>|</literal>), question mark
|
---|
1928 | (<literal>?</literal>), and asterisk (<literal>*</literal>).
|
---|
1929 | </para>
|
---|
1930 |
|
---|
1931 | <para>
|
---|
1932 | This example demonstrates how to instruct the host-resolver
|
---|
1933 | mechanism to resolve all domain and probably some mirrors of
|
---|
1934 | www.blocked-site.info site with IP 127.0.0.1:
|
---|
1935 | </para>
|
---|
1936 |
|
---|
1937 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1938 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/e1000/0/LUN#0/AttachedDriver/Config/HostResolverMappings/all_blocked_site/HostIP" 127.0.0.1
|
---|
1939 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1940 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/e1000/0/LUN#0/AttachedDriver/Config/HostResolverMappings/all_blocked_site/HostNamePattern" "*.blocked-site.*|*.fb.org"</screen>
|
---|
1941 |
|
---|
1942 | <para>
|
---|
1943 | The host resolver mechanism should be enabled to use
|
---|
1944 | user-defined mapping rules, otherwise they do not have any
|
---|
1945 | effect.
|
---|
1946 | </para>
|
---|
1947 |
|
---|
1948 | </sect3>
|
---|
1949 |
|
---|
1950 | </sect2>
|
---|
1951 |
|
---|
1952 | <sect2 id="nat-adv-alias">
|
---|
1953 |
|
---|
1954 | <title>Configuring Aliasing of the NAT Engine</title>
|
---|
1955 |
|
---|
1956 | <para>
|
---|
1957 | By default, the NAT core uses aliasing and uses random ports
|
---|
1958 | when generating an alias for a connection. This works well for
|
---|
1959 | the most protocols like SSH, FTP and so on. Though some
|
---|
1960 | protocols might need a more transparent behavior or may depend
|
---|
1961 | on the real port number the packet was sent from. You can change
|
---|
1962 | the NAT mode by using the following commands:
|
---|
1963 | </para>
|
---|
1964 |
|
---|
1965 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
1966 | --nataliasmode1 proxyonly</screen>
|
---|
1967 |
|
---|
1968 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm "Linux Guest" --nataliasmode1 sameports</screen>
|
---|
1969 |
|
---|
1970 | <para>
|
---|
1971 | The first example disables aliasing and switches NAT into
|
---|
1972 | transparent mode, the second example enforces preserving of port
|
---|
1973 | values. These modes can be combined if necessary.
|
---|
1974 | </para>
|
---|
1975 |
|
---|
1976 | </sect2>
|
---|
1977 |
|
---|
1978 | </sect1>
|
---|
1979 |
|
---|
1980 | <sect1 id="changedmi">
|
---|
1981 |
|
---|
1982 | <title>Configuring the BIOS DMI Information</title>
|
---|
1983 |
|
---|
1984 | <para>
|
---|
1985 | The DMI data that &product-name; provides to guests can be changed
|
---|
1986 | for a specific VM. Use the following commands to configure the DMI
|
---|
1987 | BIOS information. In case your VM is configured to use EFI
|
---|
1988 | firmware you need to replace <literal>pcbios</literal> by
|
---|
1989 | <literal>efi</literal> in the keys.
|
---|
1990 | </para>
|
---|
1991 |
|
---|
1992 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
1993 |
|
---|
1994 | <listitem>
|
---|
1995 | <para>
|
---|
1996 | DMI BIOS information (type 0)
|
---|
1997 | </para>
|
---|
1998 |
|
---|
1999 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2000 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSVendor" "BIOS Vendor"
|
---|
2001 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2002 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSVersion" "BIOS Version"
|
---|
2003 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2004 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSReleaseDate" "BIOS Release Date"
|
---|
2005 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2006 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSReleaseMajor" 1
|
---|
2007 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2008 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSReleaseMinor" 2
|
---|
2009 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2010 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSFirmwareMajor" 3
|
---|
2011 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2012 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBIOSFirmwareMinor" 4</screen>
|
---|
2013 | </listitem>
|
---|
2014 |
|
---|
2015 | <listitem>
|
---|
2016 | <para>
|
---|
2017 | DMI system information (type 1)
|
---|
2018 | </para>
|
---|
2019 |
|
---|
2020 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2021 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemVendor" "System Vendor"
|
---|
2022 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2023 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemProduct" "System Product"
|
---|
2024 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2025 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemVersion" "System Version"
|
---|
2026 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2027 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemSerial" "System Serial"
|
---|
2028 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2029 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemSKU" "System SKU"
|
---|
2030 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2031 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemFamily" "System Family"
|
---|
2032 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2033 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemUuid" \
|
---|
2034 | "9852bf98-b83c-49db-a8de-182c42c7226b"</screen>
|
---|
2035 | </listitem>
|
---|
2036 |
|
---|
2037 | <listitem>
|
---|
2038 | <para>
|
---|
2039 | DMI board information (type 2)
|
---|
2040 | </para>
|
---|
2041 |
|
---|
2042 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2043 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardVendor" "Board Vendor"
|
---|
2044 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2045 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardProduct" "Board Product"
|
---|
2046 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2047 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardVersion" "Board Version"
|
---|
2048 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2049 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardSerial" "Board Serial"
|
---|
2050 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2051 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardAssetTag" "Board Tag"
|
---|
2052 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2053 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardLocInChass" "Board Location"
|
---|
2054 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2055 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiBoardBoardType" 10</screen>
|
---|
2056 | </listitem>
|
---|
2057 |
|
---|
2058 | <listitem>
|
---|
2059 | <para>
|
---|
2060 | DMI system enclosure or chassis (type 3)
|
---|
2061 | </para>
|
---|
2062 |
|
---|
2063 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2064 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiChassisVendor" "Chassis Vendor"
|
---|
2065 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2066 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiChassisType" 3
|
---|
2067 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2068 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiChassisVersion" "Chassis Version"
|
---|
2069 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2070 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiChassisSerial" "Chassis Serial"
|
---|
2071 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2072 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiChassisAssetTag" "Chassis Tag"</screen>
|
---|
2073 | </listitem>
|
---|
2074 |
|
---|
2075 | <listitem>
|
---|
2076 | <para>
|
---|
2077 | DMI processor information (type 4)
|
---|
2078 | </para>
|
---|
2079 |
|
---|
2080 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2081 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiProcManufacturer" "GenuineIntel"
|
---|
2082 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2083 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiProcVersion" "Pentium(R) III"</screen>
|
---|
2084 | </listitem>
|
---|
2085 |
|
---|
2086 | <listitem>
|
---|
2087 | <para>
|
---|
2088 | DMI OEM strings (type 11)
|
---|
2089 | </para>
|
---|
2090 |
|
---|
2091 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2092 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiOEMVBoxVer" "vboxVer_1.2.3"
|
---|
2093 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2094 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiOEMVBoxRev" "vboxRev_12345"</screen>
|
---|
2095 | </listitem>
|
---|
2096 |
|
---|
2097 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
2098 |
|
---|
2099 | <para>
|
---|
2100 | If a DMI string is not set, the default value of &product-name; is
|
---|
2101 | used. To set an empty string use
|
---|
2102 | <literal>"<EMPTY>"</literal>.
|
---|
2103 | </para>
|
---|
2104 |
|
---|
2105 | <para>
|
---|
2106 | Note that in the above list, all quoted parameters (DmiBIOSVendor,
|
---|
2107 | DmiBIOSVersion but not DmiBIOSReleaseMajor) are expected to be
|
---|
2108 | strings. If such a string is a valid number, the parameter is
|
---|
2109 | treated as number and the VM will most probably refuse to start
|
---|
2110 | with an <literal>VERR_CFGM_NOT_STRING</literal> error. In that
|
---|
2111 | case, use
|
---|
2112 | <literal>"string:<replaceable>value</replaceable>"</literal>. For
|
---|
2113 | example:
|
---|
2114 | </para>
|
---|
2115 |
|
---|
2116 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2117 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/pcbios/0/Config/DmiSystemSerial" "string:1234"</screen>
|
---|
2118 |
|
---|
2119 | <para>
|
---|
2120 | Changing this information can be necessary to provide the DMI
|
---|
2121 | information of the host to the guest to prevent Windows from
|
---|
2122 | asking for a new product key. On Linux hosts, the DMI BIOS
|
---|
2123 | information can be obtained with the following command:
|
---|
2124 | </para>
|
---|
2125 |
|
---|
2126 | <screen>$ dmidecode -t0</screen>
|
---|
2127 |
|
---|
2128 | <para>
|
---|
2129 | The DMI system information can be obtained as follows:
|
---|
2130 | </para>
|
---|
2131 |
|
---|
2132 | <screen>$ dmidecode -t1</screen>
|
---|
2133 |
|
---|
2134 | </sect1>
|
---|
2135 |
|
---|
2136 | <sect1 id="changeacpicust">
|
---|
2137 |
|
---|
2138 | <title>Configuring Custom ACPI Tables</title>
|
---|
2139 |
|
---|
2140 | <para>
|
---|
2141 | You can configure &product-name; to present up to four custom ACPI
|
---|
2142 | tables to the guest. Use a command such as the following to
|
---|
2143 | configure custom ACPI tables. Note that
|
---|
2144 | <literal>CustomTable1</literal>, <literal>CustomTable2</literal>,
|
---|
2145 | and <literal>CustomTable3</literal> are available in addition to
|
---|
2146 | <literal>CustomTable0</literal>.
|
---|
2147 | </para>
|
---|
2148 |
|
---|
2149 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
2150 | "VBoxInternal/Devices/acpi/0/Config/CustomTable0" "/path/to/table.bin"</screen>
|
---|
2151 |
|
---|
2152 | <para>
|
---|
2153 | Configuring custom ACPI tables can for example avoid the need for
|
---|
2154 | asking for a new product key on Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows
|
---|
2155 | 8 and later guests. On Linux hosts, one of the system's ACPI
|
---|
2156 | tables can be read from
|
---|
2157 | <filename>/sys/firmware/acpi/tables/</filename>.
|
---|
2158 | </para>
|
---|
2159 |
|
---|
2160 | </sect1>
|
---|
2161 |
|
---|
2162 | <sect1 id="fine-tune-timers">
|
---|
2163 |
|
---|
2164 | <title>Fine Tuning Timers and Time Synchronization</title>
|
---|
2165 |
|
---|
2166 | <sect2 id="changetscmode">
|
---|
2167 |
|
---|
2168 | <title>Configuring the Guest Time Stamp Counter (TSC) to Reflect Guest
|
---|
2169 | Execution</title>
|
---|
2170 |
|
---|
2171 | <para>
|
---|
2172 | By default, &product-name; keeps all sources of time visible to
|
---|
2173 | the guest synchronized to a single time source, the monotonic
|
---|
2174 | host time. This reflects the assumptions of many guest operating
|
---|
2175 | systems, which expect all time sources to reflect "wall clock"
|
---|
2176 | time. In special circumstances it may be useful however to make
|
---|
2177 | the time stamp counter (TSC) in the guest reflect the time
|
---|
2178 | actually spent executing the guest.
|
---|
2179 | </para>
|
---|
2180 |
|
---|
2181 | <para>
|
---|
2182 | This special TSC handling mode can be enabled on a per-VM basis,
|
---|
2183 | and for best results must be used only in combination with
|
---|
2184 | hardware virtualization. To enable this mode use the following
|
---|
2185 | command:
|
---|
2186 | </para>
|
---|
2187 |
|
---|
2188 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal/TM/TSCTiedToExecution" 1</screen>
|
---|
2189 |
|
---|
2190 | <para>
|
---|
2191 | To revert to the default TSC handling mode use:
|
---|
2192 | </para>
|
---|
2193 |
|
---|
2194 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal/TM/TSCTiedToExecution"</screen>
|
---|
2195 |
|
---|
2196 | <para>
|
---|
2197 | Note that if you use the special TSC handling mode with a guest
|
---|
2198 | operating system which is very strict about the consistency of
|
---|
2199 | time sources you may get a warning or error message about the
|
---|
2200 | timing inconsistency. It may also cause clocks to become
|
---|
2201 | unreliable with some guest operating systems depending on how
|
---|
2202 | they use the TSC.
|
---|
2203 | </para>
|
---|
2204 |
|
---|
2205 | </sect2>
|
---|
2206 |
|
---|
2207 | <sect2 id="warpguest">
|
---|
2208 |
|
---|
2209 | <title>Accelerate or Slow Down the Guest Clock</title>
|
---|
2210 |
|
---|
2211 | <para>
|
---|
2212 | For certain purposes it can be useful to accelerate or to slow
|
---|
2213 | down the virtual guest clock. This can be achieved as follows:
|
---|
2214 | </para>
|
---|
2215 |
|
---|
2216 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal/TM/WarpDrivePercentage" 200</screen>
|
---|
2217 |
|
---|
2218 | <para>
|
---|
2219 | The above example will double the speed of the guest clock while
|
---|
2220 | </para>
|
---|
2221 |
|
---|
2222 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal/TM/WarpDrivePercentage" 50</screen>
|
---|
2223 |
|
---|
2224 | <para>
|
---|
2225 | will halve the speed of the guest clock. Note that changing the
|
---|
2226 | rate of the virtual clock can confuse the guest and can even
|
---|
2227 | lead to abnormal guest behavior. For instance, a higher clock
|
---|
2228 | rate means shorter timeouts for virtual devices with the result
|
---|
2229 | that a slightly increased response time of a virtual device due
|
---|
2230 | to an increased host load can cause guest failures. Note further
|
---|
2231 | that any time synchronization mechanism will frequently try to
|
---|
2232 | resynchronize the guest clock with the reference clock, which is
|
---|
2233 | the host clock if the &product-name; Guest Additions are active.
|
---|
2234 | Therefore any time synchronization should be disabled if the
|
---|
2235 | rate of the guest clock is changed as described above. See
|
---|
2236 | <xref linkend="changetimesync" />.
|
---|
2237 | </para>
|
---|
2238 |
|
---|
2239 | </sect2>
|
---|
2240 |
|
---|
2241 | <sect2 id="changetimesync">
|
---|
2242 |
|
---|
2243 | <title>Tuning the Guest Additions Time Synchronization Parameters</title>
|
---|
2244 |
|
---|
2245 | <para>
|
---|
2246 | The &product-name; Guest Additions ensure that the guest's
|
---|
2247 | system time is synchronized with the host time. There are
|
---|
2248 | several parameters which can be tuned. The parameters can be set
|
---|
2249 | for a specific VM using the following command:
|
---|
2250 | </para>
|
---|
2251 |
|
---|
2252 | <screen>$ VBoxManage guestproperty set <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "/VirtualBox/GuestAdd/VBoxService/<replaceable>property</replaceable>" <replaceable>value</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
2253 |
|
---|
2254 | <para>
|
---|
2255 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
2256 | </para>
|
---|
2257 |
|
---|
2258 | <variablelist>
|
---|
2259 |
|
---|
2260 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2261 | <term>
|
---|
2262 | <option>--timesync-interval</option>
|
---|
2263 | </term>
|
---|
2264 |
|
---|
2265 | <listitem>
|
---|
2266 | <para>
|
---|
2267 | Specifies the interval at which to synchronize the time
|
---|
2268 | with the host. The default is 10000 ms (10 seconds).
|
---|
2269 | </para>
|
---|
2270 | </listitem>
|
---|
2271 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2272 |
|
---|
2273 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2274 | <term>
|
---|
2275 | <option>--timesync-min-adjust</option>
|
---|
2276 | </term>
|
---|
2277 |
|
---|
2278 | <listitem>
|
---|
2279 | <para>
|
---|
2280 | The minimum absolute drift value measured in milliseconds
|
---|
2281 | to make adjustments for. The default is 1000 ms on OS/2
|
---|
2282 | and 100 ms elsewhere.
|
---|
2283 | </para>
|
---|
2284 | </listitem>
|
---|
2285 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2286 |
|
---|
2287 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2288 | <term>
|
---|
2289 | <option>--timesync-latency-factor</option>
|
---|
2290 | </term>
|
---|
2291 |
|
---|
2292 | <listitem>
|
---|
2293 | <para>
|
---|
2294 | The factor to multiply the time query latency with to
|
---|
2295 | calculate the dynamic minimum adjust time. The default is
|
---|
2296 | 8 times, which means as follows:
|
---|
2297 | </para>
|
---|
2298 |
|
---|
2299 | <para>
|
---|
2300 | Measure the time it takes to determine the host time, the
|
---|
2301 | guest has to contact the VM host service which may take
|
---|
2302 | some time. Multiply this value by 8 and do an adjustment
|
---|
2303 | only if the time difference between host and guest is
|
---|
2304 | bigger than this value. Do not do any time adjustment
|
---|
2305 | otherwise.
|
---|
2306 | </para>
|
---|
2307 | </listitem>
|
---|
2308 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2309 |
|
---|
2310 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2311 | <term>
|
---|
2312 | <option>--timesync-max-latency</option>
|
---|
2313 | </term>
|
---|
2314 |
|
---|
2315 | <listitem>
|
---|
2316 | <para>
|
---|
2317 | The max host timer query latency to accept. The default is
|
---|
2318 | 250 ms.
|
---|
2319 | </para>
|
---|
2320 | </listitem>
|
---|
2321 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2322 |
|
---|
2323 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2324 | <term>
|
---|
2325 | <option>--timesync-set-threshold</option>
|
---|
2326 | </term>
|
---|
2327 |
|
---|
2328 | <listitem>
|
---|
2329 | <para>
|
---|
2330 | The absolute drift threshold, given as milliseconds where
|
---|
2331 | to start setting the time instead of trying to smoothly
|
---|
2332 | adjust it. The default is 20 minutes.
|
---|
2333 | </para>
|
---|
2334 | </listitem>
|
---|
2335 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2336 |
|
---|
2337 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2338 | <term>
|
---|
2339 | <option>--timesync-set-start</option>
|
---|
2340 | </term>
|
---|
2341 |
|
---|
2342 | <listitem>
|
---|
2343 | <para>
|
---|
2344 | Set the time when starting the time sync service.
|
---|
2345 | </para>
|
---|
2346 | </listitem>
|
---|
2347 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2348 |
|
---|
2349 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2350 | <term>
|
---|
2351 | <option>--timesync-set-on-restore 0|1</option>
|
---|
2352 | </term>
|
---|
2353 |
|
---|
2354 | <listitem>
|
---|
2355 | <para>
|
---|
2356 | Set the time after the VM was restored from a saved state
|
---|
2357 | when passing 1 as parameter. This is the default. Disable
|
---|
2358 | by passing 0. In the latter case, the time will be
|
---|
2359 | adjusted smoothly, which can take a long time.
|
---|
2360 | </para>
|
---|
2361 | </listitem>
|
---|
2362 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2363 |
|
---|
2364 | </variablelist>
|
---|
2365 |
|
---|
2366 | <para>
|
---|
2367 | All these parameters can be specified as command line parameters
|
---|
2368 | to VBoxService as well.
|
---|
2369 | </para>
|
---|
2370 |
|
---|
2371 | </sect2>
|
---|
2372 |
|
---|
2373 | <sect2 id="disabletimesync">
|
---|
2374 |
|
---|
2375 | <title>Disabling the Guest Additions Time Synchronization</title>
|
---|
2376 |
|
---|
2377 | <para>
|
---|
2378 | Once installed and started, the &product-name; Guest Additions
|
---|
2379 | will try to synchronize the guest time with the host time. This
|
---|
2380 | can be prevented by forbidding the guest service from reading
|
---|
2381 | the host clock:
|
---|
2382 | </para>
|
---|
2383 |
|
---|
2384 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal/Devices/VMMDev/0/Config/GetHostTimeDisabled" 1</screen>
|
---|
2385 |
|
---|
2386 | </sect2>
|
---|
2387 |
|
---|
2388 | </sect1>
|
---|
2389 |
|
---|
2390 | <sect1 id="vboxbowsolaris11">
|
---|
2391 |
|
---|
2392 | <title>Installing the Alternate Bridged Networking Driver on Oracle Solaris 11
|
---|
2393 | Hosts</title>
|
---|
2394 |
|
---|
2395 | <para>
|
---|
2396 | &product-name; includes a network filter driver that utilizes
|
---|
2397 | Oracle Solaris 11's Crossbow functionality. By default, this new
|
---|
2398 | driver is installed for Oracle Solaris 11 hosts that have support
|
---|
2399 | for it.
|
---|
2400 | </para>
|
---|
2401 |
|
---|
2402 | <para>
|
---|
2403 | To force installation of the older STREAMS based network filter
|
---|
2404 | driver, execute as root the following command before installing
|
---|
2405 | the &product-name; package:
|
---|
2406 | </para>
|
---|
2407 |
|
---|
2408 | <screen>$ touch /etc/vboxinst_vboxflt</screen>
|
---|
2409 |
|
---|
2410 | <para>
|
---|
2411 | To force installation of the Crossbow based network filter driver,
|
---|
2412 | execute as root the following command before installing the
|
---|
2413 | &product-name; package:
|
---|
2414 | </para>
|
---|
2415 |
|
---|
2416 | <screen>$ touch /etc/vboxinst_vboxbow</screen>
|
---|
2417 |
|
---|
2418 | <para>
|
---|
2419 | To check which driver is currently being used by &product-name;,
|
---|
2420 | execute:
|
---|
2421 | </para>
|
---|
2422 |
|
---|
2423 | <screen>$ modinfo | grep vbox</screen>
|
---|
2424 |
|
---|
2425 | <para>
|
---|
2426 | If the output contains "vboxbow", it indicates &product-name; is
|
---|
2427 | using the Crossbow network filter driver, while the name "vboxflt"
|
---|
2428 | indicates usage of the older STREAMS network filter.
|
---|
2429 | </para>
|
---|
2430 |
|
---|
2431 | </sect1>
|
---|
2432 |
|
---|
2433 | <sect1 id="vboxbowvnictemplates">
|
---|
2434 |
|
---|
2435 | <title>&product-name; VNIC Templates for VLANs on Oracle Solaris 11 Hosts</title>
|
---|
2436 |
|
---|
2437 | <para>
|
---|
2438 | &product-name; supports Virtual Network Interface (VNIC) templates
|
---|
2439 | for configuring VMs over VLANs. An &product-name; VNIC template is
|
---|
2440 | a VNIC whose name starts with
|
---|
2441 | <filename>vboxvnic_template</filename>. The string is
|
---|
2442 | case-sensitive.
|
---|
2443 | </para>
|
---|
2444 |
|
---|
2445 | <para>
|
---|
2446 | On Oracle Solaris 11 hosts, when Crossbow-based bridged networking
|
---|
2447 | is used, a VNIC template may be used to specify the VLAN ID to use
|
---|
2448 | while bridging over a network link.
|
---|
2449 | </para>
|
---|
2450 |
|
---|
2451 | <para>
|
---|
2452 | The following is an example of how to use a VNIC template to
|
---|
2453 | configure a VM over a VLAN. Create an &product-name; VNIC
|
---|
2454 | template, by executing as root:
|
---|
2455 | </para>
|
---|
2456 |
|
---|
2457 | <screen># dladm create-vnic -t -l nge0 -v 23 vboxvnic_template0</screen>
|
---|
2458 |
|
---|
2459 | <para>
|
---|
2460 | This will create a temporary VNIC template over interface
|
---|
2461 | <command>nge0</command> with the VLAN ID 23. To create VNIC
|
---|
2462 | templates that are persistent across host reboots, skip the
|
---|
2463 | <option>-t</option> parameter in the above command. You may check
|
---|
2464 | the current state of links using the following command:
|
---|
2465 | </para>
|
---|
2466 |
|
---|
2467 | <screen>$ dladm show-link
|
---|
2468 | LINK CLASS MTU STATE BRIDGE OVER
|
---|
2469 | nge0 phys 1500 up -- --
|
---|
2470 | nge1 phys 1500 down -- --
|
---|
2471 | vboxvnic_template0 vnic 1500 up -- nge0
|
---|
2472 |
|
---|
2473 | $ dladm show-vnic
|
---|
2474 | LINK OVER SPEED MACADDRESS MACADDRTYPE VID
|
---|
2475 | vboxvnic_template0 nge0 1000 2:8:20:25:12:75 random 23</screen>
|
---|
2476 |
|
---|
2477 | <para>
|
---|
2478 | Once the VNIC template is created, any VMs that need to be on VLAN
|
---|
2479 | 23 over the interface <command>nge0</command> can be configured to
|
---|
2480 | bridge using this VNIC template.
|
---|
2481 | </para>
|
---|
2482 |
|
---|
2483 | <para>
|
---|
2484 | VNIC templates makes managing VMs on VLANs simpler and efficient.
|
---|
2485 | The VLAN details are not stored as part of every VM's
|
---|
2486 | configuration but rather inherited from the VNIC template while
|
---|
2487 | starting the VM. The VNIC template itself can be modified anytime
|
---|
2488 | using the <command>dladm</command> command.
|
---|
2489 | </para>
|
---|
2490 |
|
---|
2491 | <para>
|
---|
2492 | VNIC templates can be created with additional properties such as
|
---|
2493 | bandwidth limits and CPU fanout. Refer to your Oracle Solaris
|
---|
2494 | network documentation for details. The additional properties are
|
---|
2495 | also applied to VMs which bridge using the VNIC template.
|
---|
2496 | </para>
|
---|
2497 |
|
---|
2498 | </sect1>
|
---|
2499 |
|
---|
2500 | <sect1 id="addhostonlysolaris">
|
---|
2501 |
|
---|
2502 | <title>Configuring Multiple Host-Only Network Interfaces on Oracle Solaris
|
---|
2503 | Hosts</title>
|
---|
2504 |
|
---|
2505 | <para>
|
---|
2506 | By default &product-name; provides you with one host-only network
|
---|
2507 | interface. Adding more host-only network interfaces on Oracle
|
---|
2508 | Solaris hosts requires manual configuration. Here is how to add
|
---|
2509 | another host-only network interface.
|
---|
2510 | </para>
|
---|
2511 |
|
---|
2512 | <para>
|
---|
2513 | Begin by stopping all running VMs. Then, unplumb the existing
|
---|
2514 | "vboxnet0" interface by execute the following command as root:
|
---|
2515 | </para>
|
---|
2516 |
|
---|
2517 | <screen># ifconfig vboxnet0 unplumb</screen>
|
---|
2518 |
|
---|
2519 | <para>
|
---|
2520 | If you have several vboxnet interfaces, you will need to unplumb
|
---|
2521 | all of them. Once all vboxnet interfaces are unplumbed, remove the
|
---|
2522 | driver by executing the following command as root:
|
---|
2523 | </para>
|
---|
2524 |
|
---|
2525 | <screen># rem_drv vboxnet</screen>
|
---|
2526 |
|
---|
2527 | <para>
|
---|
2528 | Edit the file
|
---|
2529 | <filename>/platform/i86pc/kernel/drv/vboxnet.conf</filename> and
|
---|
2530 | add a line for the new interface we want to add as shown below:
|
---|
2531 | </para>
|
---|
2532 |
|
---|
2533 | <screen>name="vboxnet" parent="pseudo" instance=1;
|
---|
2534 | name="vboxnet" parent="pseudo" instance=2;</screen>
|
---|
2535 |
|
---|
2536 | <para>
|
---|
2537 | Add as many of these lines as required with each line having a
|
---|
2538 | unique instance number.
|
---|
2539 | </para>
|
---|
2540 |
|
---|
2541 | <para>
|
---|
2542 | Next, reload the vboxnet driver by executing the following command
|
---|
2543 | as root:
|
---|
2544 | </para>
|
---|
2545 |
|
---|
2546 | <screen># add_drv vboxnet</screen>
|
---|
2547 |
|
---|
2548 | <para>
|
---|
2549 | On Oracle Solaris 11.1 and newer hosts you may want to rename the
|
---|
2550 | default vanity interface name. To check what name has been
|
---|
2551 | assigned, execute:
|
---|
2552 | </para>
|
---|
2553 |
|
---|
2554 | <screen>$ dladm show-phys
|
---|
2555 | LINK MEDIA STATE SPEED DUPLEX DEVICE
|
---|
2556 | net0 Ethernet up 100 full e1000g0
|
---|
2557 | net2 Ethernet up 1000 full vboxnet1
|
---|
2558 | net1 Ethernet up 1000 full vboxnet0</screen>
|
---|
2559 |
|
---|
2560 | <para>
|
---|
2561 | In the above example, we can rename "net2" to "vboxnet1" before
|
---|
2562 | proceeding to plumb the interface. This can be done by executing
|
---|
2563 | as root:
|
---|
2564 | </para>
|
---|
2565 |
|
---|
2566 | <screen># dladm rename-link net2 vboxnet1</screen>
|
---|
2567 |
|
---|
2568 | <para>
|
---|
2569 | Now plumb all the interfaces using <command>ifconfig
|
---|
2570 | vboxnet<replaceable>X</replaceable> plumb</command>, where
|
---|
2571 | <replaceable>X</replaceable> would be 1 in this case. Once the
|
---|
2572 | interface is plumbed, it may be configured like any other network
|
---|
2573 | interface. Refer to the <command>ifconfig</command> documentation
|
---|
2574 | for further details.
|
---|
2575 | </para>
|
---|
2576 |
|
---|
2577 | <para>
|
---|
2578 | To make the settings for the newly added interfaces persistent
|
---|
2579 | across reboots, you will need to edit the files
|
---|
2580 | <filename>/etc/inet/netmasks</filename>, and if you are using NWAM
|
---|
2581 | <filename>/etc/nwam/llp</filename> and add the appropriate entries
|
---|
2582 | to set the netmask and static IP for each of those interfaces. The
|
---|
2583 | &product-name; installer only updates these configuration files
|
---|
2584 | for the one "vboxnet0" interface it creates by default.
|
---|
2585 | </para>
|
---|
2586 |
|
---|
2587 | </sect1>
|
---|
2588 |
|
---|
2589 | <sect1 id="solariscodedumper">
|
---|
2590 |
|
---|
2591 | <title>Configuring the &product-name; CoreDumper on Oracle Solaris Hosts</title>
|
---|
2592 |
|
---|
2593 | <para>
|
---|
2594 | &product-name; is capable of producing its own core files for
|
---|
2595 | extensive debugging when things go wrong. Currently this is only
|
---|
2596 | available on Oracle Solaris hosts.
|
---|
2597 | </para>
|
---|
2598 |
|
---|
2599 | <para>
|
---|
2600 | The &product-name; CoreDumper can be enabled using the following
|
---|
2601 | command:
|
---|
2602 | </para>
|
---|
2603 |
|
---|
2604 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> VBoxInternal2/CoreDumpEnabled 1</screen>
|
---|
2605 |
|
---|
2606 | <para>
|
---|
2607 | You can specify which directory to use for core dumps with this
|
---|
2608 | command, as follows:
|
---|
2609 | </para>
|
---|
2610 |
|
---|
2611 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> VBoxInternal2/CoreDumpDir <replaceable>path-to-directory</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
2612 |
|
---|
2613 | <para>
|
---|
2614 | Make sure the directory you specify is on a volume with sufficient
|
---|
2615 | free space and that the &product-name; process has sufficient
|
---|
2616 | permissions to write files to this directory. If you skip this
|
---|
2617 | command and do not specify any core dump directory, the current
|
---|
2618 | directory of the &product-name; executable will be used. This
|
---|
2619 | would most likely fail when writing cores as they are protected
|
---|
2620 | with root permissions. It is recommended you explicitly set a core
|
---|
2621 | dump directory.
|
---|
2622 | </para>
|
---|
2623 |
|
---|
2624 | <para>
|
---|
2625 | You must specify when the &product-name; CoreDumper should be
|
---|
2626 | triggered. This is done using the following commands:
|
---|
2627 | </para>
|
---|
2628 |
|
---|
2629 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> VBoxInternal2/CoreDumpReplaceSystemDump 1
|
---|
2630 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> VBoxInternal2/CoreDumpLive 1</screen>
|
---|
2631 |
|
---|
2632 | <para>
|
---|
2633 | At least one of the above two commands will have to be provided if
|
---|
2634 | you have enabled the &product-name; CoreDumper.
|
---|
2635 | </para>
|
---|
2636 |
|
---|
2637 | <para>
|
---|
2638 | Setting <literal>CoreDumpReplaceSystemDump</literal> sets up the
|
---|
2639 | VM to override the host's core dumping mechanism and in the event
|
---|
2640 | of any crash only the &product-name; CoreDumper would produce the
|
---|
2641 | core file.
|
---|
2642 | </para>
|
---|
2643 |
|
---|
2644 | <para>
|
---|
2645 | Setting <literal>CoreDumpLive</literal> sets up the VM to produce
|
---|
2646 | cores whenever the VM process receives a
|
---|
2647 | <literal>SIGUSR2</literal> signal. After producing the core file,
|
---|
2648 | the VM will not be terminated and will continue to run. You can
|
---|
2649 | thus take cores of the VM process using the following command:
|
---|
2650 | </para>
|
---|
2651 |
|
---|
2652 | <screen>$ kill -s SIGUSR2 <replaceable>VM-process-id</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
2653 |
|
---|
2654 | <para>
|
---|
2655 | The &product-name; CoreDumper creates core files of the form
|
---|
2656 | <filename>core.vb.<replaceable>process-name</replaceable>.<replaceable>process-ID</replaceable></filename>
|
---|
2657 | such as <filename>core.vb.VBoxHeadless.11321</filename>.
|
---|
2658 | </para>
|
---|
2659 |
|
---|
2660 | </sect1>
|
---|
2661 |
|
---|
2662 | <sect1 id="vboxandsolzvmm">
|
---|
2663 |
|
---|
2664 | <title>&product-name; and Oracle Solaris Kernel Zones</title>
|
---|
2665 |
|
---|
2666 | <para>
|
---|
2667 | Oracle Solaris kernel zones on x86-based systems make use of
|
---|
2668 | hardware-assisted virtualization features like &product-name;
|
---|
2669 | does. However, for kernel zones and &product-name; to share this
|
---|
2670 | hardware resource, they need to cooperate.
|
---|
2671 | </para>
|
---|
2672 |
|
---|
2673 | <para>
|
---|
2674 | By default, due to performance reasons, &product-name; acquires
|
---|
2675 | the hardware-assisted virtualization resource (VT-x/AMD-V)
|
---|
2676 | globally on the host machine and uses it until the last
|
---|
2677 | &product-name; VM that requires it is powered off. This prevents
|
---|
2678 | other software from using VT-x/AMD-V during the time
|
---|
2679 | &product-name; has taken control of it.
|
---|
2680 | </para>
|
---|
2681 |
|
---|
2682 | <para>
|
---|
2683 | &product-name; can be instructed to relinquish use of
|
---|
2684 | hardware-assisted virtualization features when not executing guest
|
---|
2685 | code, thereby allowing kernel zones to make use of them. To do
|
---|
2686 | this, shutdown all &product-name; VMs and execute the following
|
---|
2687 | command:
|
---|
2688 | </para>
|
---|
2689 |
|
---|
2690 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setproperty hwvirtexclusive off</screen>
|
---|
2691 |
|
---|
2692 | <para>
|
---|
2693 | This command needs to be executed only once as the setting is
|
---|
2694 | stored as part of the global &product-name; settings which will
|
---|
2695 | continue to persist across host-reboots and &product-name;
|
---|
2696 | upgrades.
|
---|
2697 | </para>
|
---|
2698 |
|
---|
2699 | </sect1>
|
---|
2700 |
|
---|
2701 | <sect1 id="guitweaks">
|
---|
2702 |
|
---|
2703 | <title>Locking Down the &product-name; GUI</title>
|
---|
2704 |
|
---|
2705 | <sect2 id="customize-vm-manager">
|
---|
2706 |
|
---|
2707 | <title>Customizing the VirtualBox Manager</title>
|
---|
2708 |
|
---|
2709 | <para>
|
---|
2710 | There are several advanced customization settings for locking
|
---|
2711 | down the VirtualBox Manager. Locking down means removing some
|
---|
2712 | features that the user should not see.
|
---|
2713 | </para>
|
---|
2714 |
|
---|
2715 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/Customizations <replaceable>property</replaceable>[,<replaceable>property</replaceable> ...]</screen>
|
---|
2716 |
|
---|
2717 | <para>
|
---|
2718 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> is one of the following
|
---|
2719 | properties:
|
---|
2720 | </para>
|
---|
2721 |
|
---|
2722 | <variablelist>
|
---|
2723 |
|
---|
2724 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2725 | <term>
|
---|
2726 | <literal>noSelector</literal>
|
---|
2727 | </term>
|
---|
2728 |
|
---|
2729 | <listitem>
|
---|
2730 | <para>
|
---|
2731 | Do not allow users to start the VirtualBox Manager. Trying
|
---|
2732 | to do so will show a window containing a proper error
|
---|
2733 | message.
|
---|
2734 | </para>
|
---|
2735 | </listitem>
|
---|
2736 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2737 |
|
---|
2738 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2739 | <term>
|
---|
2740 | <literal>noMenuBar</literal>
|
---|
2741 | </term>
|
---|
2742 |
|
---|
2743 | <listitem>
|
---|
2744 | <para>
|
---|
2745 | VM windows will not contain a menu bar.
|
---|
2746 | </para>
|
---|
2747 | </listitem>
|
---|
2748 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2749 |
|
---|
2750 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2751 | <term>
|
---|
2752 | <literal>noStatusBar</literal>
|
---|
2753 | </term>
|
---|
2754 |
|
---|
2755 | <listitem>
|
---|
2756 | <para>
|
---|
2757 | VM windows will not contain a status bar.
|
---|
2758 | </para>
|
---|
2759 | </listitem>
|
---|
2760 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2761 |
|
---|
2762 | </variablelist>
|
---|
2763 |
|
---|
2764 | <para>
|
---|
2765 | To disable any of these VirtualBox Manager customizations use
|
---|
2766 | the following command:
|
---|
2767 | </para>
|
---|
2768 |
|
---|
2769 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/Customizations</screen>
|
---|
2770 |
|
---|
2771 | </sect2>
|
---|
2772 |
|
---|
2773 | <sect2 id="customize-vm-selector">
|
---|
2774 |
|
---|
2775 | <title>VM Selector Customization</title>
|
---|
2776 |
|
---|
2777 | <para>
|
---|
2778 | The following per-machine VM extradata settings can be used to
|
---|
2779 | change the behavior of the VM selector window in respect of
|
---|
2780 | certain VMs:
|
---|
2781 | </para>
|
---|
2782 |
|
---|
2783 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> <replaceable>property</replaceable> true</screen>
|
---|
2784 |
|
---|
2785 | <para>
|
---|
2786 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> can be any of the following:
|
---|
2787 | </para>
|
---|
2788 |
|
---|
2789 | <variablelist>
|
---|
2790 |
|
---|
2791 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2792 | <term>
|
---|
2793 | <literal>GUI/HideDetails</literal>
|
---|
2794 | </term>
|
---|
2795 |
|
---|
2796 | <listitem>
|
---|
2797 | <para>
|
---|
2798 | Do not show the VM configuration of a certain VM. The
|
---|
2799 | details window will remain just empty if this VM is
|
---|
2800 | selected.
|
---|
2801 | </para>
|
---|
2802 | </listitem>
|
---|
2803 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2804 |
|
---|
2805 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2806 | <term>
|
---|
2807 | <literal>GUI/PreventReconfiguration</literal>
|
---|
2808 | </term>
|
---|
2809 |
|
---|
2810 | <listitem>
|
---|
2811 | <para>
|
---|
2812 | Do not allow the user to open the
|
---|
2813 | <emphasis role="bold">Settings</emphasis> dialog for a
|
---|
2814 | certain VM.
|
---|
2815 | </para>
|
---|
2816 | </listitem>
|
---|
2817 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2818 |
|
---|
2819 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2820 | <term>
|
---|
2821 | <literal>GUI/PreventSnapshotOperations</literal>
|
---|
2822 | </term>
|
---|
2823 |
|
---|
2824 | <listitem>
|
---|
2825 | <para>
|
---|
2826 | Prevent snapshot operations for a VM from the GUI, either
|
---|
2827 | at runtime or when the VM is powered off.
|
---|
2828 | </para>
|
---|
2829 | </listitem>
|
---|
2830 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2831 |
|
---|
2832 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2833 | <term>
|
---|
2834 | <literal>GUI/HideFromManager</literal>
|
---|
2835 | </term>
|
---|
2836 |
|
---|
2837 | <listitem>
|
---|
2838 | <para>
|
---|
2839 | Hide a certain VM in the VM selector window.
|
---|
2840 | </para>
|
---|
2841 | </listitem>
|
---|
2842 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2843 |
|
---|
2844 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2845 | <term>
|
---|
2846 | <literal>GUI/PreventApplicationUpdate</literal>
|
---|
2847 | </term>
|
---|
2848 |
|
---|
2849 | <listitem>
|
---|
2850 | <para>
|
---|
2851 | Disable the automatic update check and hide the
|
---|
2852 | corresponding menu item.
|
---|
2853 | </para>
|
---|
2854 | </listitem>
|
---|
2855 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2856 |
|
---|
2857 | </variablelist>
|
---|
2858 |
|
---|
2859 | <para>
|
---|
2860 | Note that these settings do not prevent the user from
|
---|
2861 | reconfiguring the VM by using the <command>VBoxManage
|
---|
2862 | modifyvm</command> command.
|
---|
2863 | </para>
|
---|
2864 |
|
---|
2865 | </sect2>
|
---|
2866 |
|
---|
2867 | <sect2 id="config-vm-selector-menu">
|
---|
2868 |
|
---|
2869 | <title>Configure VM Selector Menu Entries</title>
|
---|
2870 |
|
---|
2871 | <para>
|
---|
2872 | You can disable, or blacklist, certain entries in the global
|
---|
2873 | settings page of the VM selector:
|
---|
2874 | </para>
|
---|
2875 |
|
---|
2876 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/RestrictedGlobalSettingsPages <replaceable>property</replaceable>[,<replaceable>property</replaceable>...]</screen>
|
---|
2877 |
|
---|
2878 | <para>
|
---|
2879 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
2880 | </para>
|
---|
2881 |
|
---|
2882 | <variablelist>
|
---|
2883 |
|
---|
2884 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2885 | <term>
|
---|
2886 | <literal>General</literal>
|
---|
2887 | </term>
|
---|
2888 |
|
---|
2889 | <listitem>
|
---|
2890 | <para>
|
---|
2891 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">General</emphasis>
|
---|
2892 | settings pane.
|
---|
2893 | </para>
|
---|
2894 | </listitem>
|
---|
2895 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2896 |
|
---|
2897 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2898 | <term>
|
---|
2899 | <literal>Input</literal>
|
---|
2900 | </term>
|
---|
2901 |
|
---|
2902 | <listitem>
|
---|
2903 | <para>
|
---|
2904 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Input</emphasis>
|
---|
2905 | settings pane.
|
---|
2906 | </para>
|
---|
2907 | </listitem>
|
---|
2908 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2909 |
|
---|
2910 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2911 | <term>
|
---|
2912 | <literal>Update</literal>
|
---|
2913 | </term>
|
---|
2914 |
|
---|
2915 | <listitem>
|
---|
2916 | <para>
|
---|
2917 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Update</emphasis>
|
---|
2918 | settings pane.
|
---|
2919 | </para>
|
---|
2920 | </listitem>
|
---|
2921 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2922 |
|
---|
2923 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2924 | <term>
|
---|
2925 | <literal>Language</literal>
|
---|
2926 | </term>
|
---|
2927 |
|
---|
2928 | <listitem>
|
---|
2929 | <para>
|
---|
2930 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Language</emphasis>
|
---|
2931 | settings pane.
|
---|
2932 | </para>
|
---|
2933 | </listitem>
|
---|
2934 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2935 |
|
---|
2936 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2937 | <term>
|
---|
2938 | <literal>Display</literal>
|
---|
2939 | </term>
|
---|
2940 |
|
---|
2941 | <listitem>
|
---|
2942 | <para>
|
---|
2943 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Display</emphasis>
|
---|
2944 | settings pane.
|
---|
2945 | </para>
|
---|
2946 | </listitem>
|
---|
2947 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2948 |
|
---|
2949 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2950 | <term>
|
---|
2951 | <literal>Network</literal>
|
---|
2952 | </term>
|
---|
2953 |
|
---|
2954 | <listitem>
|
---|
2955 | <para>
|
---|
2956 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Network</emphasis>
|
---|
2957 | settings pane.
|
---|
2958 | </para>
|
---|
2959 | </listitem>
|
---|
2960 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2961 |
|
---|
2962 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2963 | <term>
|
---|
2964 | <literal>Extensions</literal>
|
---|
2965 | </term>
|
---|
2966 |
|
---|
2967 | <listitem>
|
---|
2968 | <para>
|
---|
2969 | Do not show the
|
---|
2970 | <emphasis role="bold">Extensions</emphasis> settings pane.
|
---|
2971 | </para>
|
---|
2972 | </listitem>
|
---|
2973 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2974 |
|
---|
2975 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
2976 | <term>
|
---|
2977 | <literal>Proxy</literal>
|
---|
2978 | </term>
|
---|
2979 |
|
---|
2980 | <listitem>
|
---|
2981 | <para>
|
---|
2982 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Proxy</emphasis>
|
---|
2983 | settings pane.
|
---|
2984 | </para>
|
---|
2985 | </listitem>
|
---|
2986 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
2987 |
|
---|
2988 | </variablelist>
|
---|
2989 |
|
---|
2990 | <para>
|
---|
2991 | This is a global setting. You can specify any combination of
|
---|
2992 | properties. To restore the default behavior, use the following
|
---|
2993 | command:
|
---|
2994 | </para>
|
---|
2995 |
|
---|
2996 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/RestrictedGlobalSettingsPages</screen>
|
---|
2997 |
|
---|
2998 | </sect2>
|
---|
2999 |
|
---|
3000 | <sect2 id="config-vm-window-menu">
|
---|
3001 |
|
---|
3002 | <title>Configure VM Window Menu Entries</title>
|
---|
3003 |
|
---|
3004 | <para>
|
---|
3005 | You can disable, or blacklist, certain menu actions in the VM
|
---|
3006 | window:
|
---|
3007 | </para>
|
---|
3008 |
|
---|
3009 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeMenus OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3010 |
|
---|
3011 | <para>
|
---|
3012 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following
|
---|
3013 | keywords:
|
---|
3014 | </para>
|
---|
3015 |
|
---|
3016 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3017 |
|
---|
3018 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3019 | <term>
|
---|
3020 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3021 | </term>
|
---|
3022 |
|
---|
3023 | <listitem>
|
---|
3024 | <para>
|
---|
3025 | Do not show any menu in the VM window.
|
---|
3026 | </para>
|
---|
3027 | </listitem>
|
---|
3028 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3029 |
|
---|
3030 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3031 | <term>
|
---|
3032 | <literal>Application</literal>
|
---|
3033 | </term>
|
---|
3034 |
|
---|
3035 | <listitem>
|
---|
3036 | <para>
|
---|
3037 | Do not show
|
---|
3038 | <emphasis role="bold">Application/File</emphasis> menu in
|
---|
3039 | the VM window.
|
---|
3040 | </para>
|
---|
3041 | </listitem>
|
---|
3042 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3043 |
|
---|
3044 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3045 | <term>
|
---|
3046 | <literal>Machine</literal>
|
---|
3047 | </term>
|
---|
3048 |
|
---|
3049 | <listitem>
|
---|
3050 | <para>
|
---|
3051 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Machine</emphasis>
|
---|
3052 | menu in the VM window.
|
---|
3053 | </para>
|
---|
3054 | </listitem>
|
---|
3055 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3056 |
|
---|
3057 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3058 | <term>
|
---|
3059 | <literal>View</literal>
|
---|
3060 | </term>
|
---|
3061 |
|
---|
3062 | <listitem>
|
---|
3063 | <para>
|
---|
3064 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">View</emphasis> menu
|
---|
3065 | in the VM window.
|
---|
3066 | </para>
|
---|
3067 | </listitem>
|
---|
3068 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3069 |
|
---|
3070 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3071 | <term>
|
---|
3072 | <literal>Input</literal>
|
---|
3073 | </term>
|
---|
3074 |
|
---|
3075 | <listitem>
|
---|
3076 | <para>
|
---|
3077 | Do not show <emphasis role="bold">Input</emphasis> menu in
|
---|
3078 | the VM window.
|
---|
3079 | </para>
|
---|
3080 | </listitem>
|
---|
3081 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3082 |
|
---|
3083 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3084 | <term>
|
---|
3085 | <literal>Devices</literal>
|
---|
3086 | </term>
|
---|
3087 |
|
---|
3088 | <listitem>
|
---|
3089 | <para>
|
---|
3090 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Devices</emphasis>
|
---|
3091 | menu in the VM window.
|
---|
3092 | </para>
|
---|
3093 | </listitem>
|
---|
3094 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3095 |
|
---|
3096 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3097 | <term>
|
---|
3098 | <literal>Help</literal>
|
---|
3099 | </term>
|
---|
3100 |
|
---|
3101 | <listitem>
|
---|
3102 | <para>
|
---|
3103 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Help</emphasis> menu
|
---|
3104 | in the VM window.
|
---|
3105 | </para>
|
---|
3106 | </listitem>
|
---|
3107 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3108 |
|
---|
3109 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3110 | <term>
|
---|
3111 | <literal>Debug</literal>
|
---|
3112 | </term>
|
---|
3113 |
|
---|
3114 | <listitem>
|
---|
3115 | <para>
|
---|
3116 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Debug</emphasis>
|
---|
3117 | menu in the VM window. The Debug menu is only visible if
|
---|
3118 | the GUI was started with special command line parameters
|
---|
3119 | or environment variable settings.
|
---|
3120 | </para>
|
---|
3121 | </listitem>
|
---|
3122 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3123 |
|
---|
3124 | </variablelist>
|
---|
3125 |
|
---|
3126 | <para>
|
---|
3127 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
3128 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use the following
|
---|
3129 | command:
|
---|
3130 | </para>
|
---|
3131 |
|
---|
3132 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeMenus</screen>
|
---|
3133 |
|
---|
3134 | <para>
|
---|
3135 | You can also disable, or blacklist, certain menu actions of
|
---|
3136 | certain menus. Use the following command to disable certain
|
---|
3137 | actions of the <emphasis role="bold">Application</emphasis>
|
---|
3138 | menu. This is only available on Mac OS X hosts.
|
---|
3139 | </para>
|
---|
3140 |
|
---|
3141 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeApplicationMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3142 |
|
---|
3143 | <para>
|
---|
3144 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following
|
---|
3145 | keywords:
|
---|
3146 | </para>
|
---|
3147 |
|
---|
3148 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3149 |
|
---|
3150 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3151 | <term>
|
---|
3152 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3153 | </term>
|
---|
3154 |
|
---|
3155 | <listitem>
|
---|
3156 | <para>
|
---|
3157 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3158 | </para>
|
---|
3159 | </listitem>
|
---|
3160 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3161 |
|
---|
3162 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3163 | <term>
|
---|
3164 | <literal>About</literal>
|
---|
3165 | </term>
|
---|
3166 |
|
---|
3167 | <listitem>
|
---|
3168 | <para>
|
---|
3169 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">About</emphasis>
|
---|
3170 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3171 | </para>
|
---|
3172 | </listitem>
|
---|
3173 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3174 |
|
---|
3175 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3176 | <term>
|
---|
3177 | <literal>Preferences</literal>
|
---|
3178 | </term>
|
---|
3179 |
|
---|
3180 | <listitem>
|
---|
3181 | <para>
|
---|
3182 | Do not show the
|
---|
3183 | <emphasis role="bold">Preferences</emphasis> menu item in
|
---|
3184 | this menu.
|
---|
3185 | </para>
|
---|
3186 | </listitem>
|
---|
3187 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3188 |
|
---|
3189 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3190 | <term>
|
---|
3191 | <literal>NetworkAccessManager</literal>
|
---|
3192 | </term>
|
---|
3193 |
|
---|
3194 | <listitem>
|
---|
3195 | <para>
|
---|
3196 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Network Operations
|
---|
3197 | Manager</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3198 | </para>
|
---|
3199 | </listitem>
|
---|
3200 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3201 |
|
---|
3202 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3203 | <term>
|
---|
3204 | <literal>ResetWarnings</literal>
|
---|
3205 | </term>
|
---|
3206 |
|
---|
3207 | <listitem>
|
---|
3208 | <para>
|
---|
3209 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Reset All
|
---|
3210 | Warnings</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3211 | </para>
|
---|
3212 | </listitem>
|
---|
3213 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3214 |
|
---|
3215 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3216 | <term>
|
---|
3217 | <literal>Close</literal>
|
---|
3218 | </term>
|
---|
3219 |
|
---|
3220 | <listitem>
|
---|
3221 | <para>
|
---|
3222 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Close</emphasis>
|
---|
3223 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3224 | </para>
|
---|
3225 | </listitem>
|
---|
3226 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3227 |
|
---|
3228 | </variablelist>
|
---|
3229 |
|
---|
3230 | <para>
|
---|
3231 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
3232 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use the following
|
---|
3233 | command:
|
---|
3234 | </para>
|
---|
3235 |
|
---|
3236 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeMenus</screen>
|
---|
3237 |
|
---|
3238 | <para>
|
---|
3239 | Use the following command to disable certain actions of the
|
---|
3240 | <emphasis role="bold">Machine</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
3241 | </para>
|
---|
3242 |
|
---|
3243 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeMachineMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3244 |
|
---|
3245 | <para>
|
---|
3246 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following
|
---|
3247 | keywords:
|
---|
3248 | </para>
|
---|
3249 |
|
---|
3250 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3251 |
|
---|
3252 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3253 | <term>
|
---|
3254 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3255 | </term>
|
---|
3256 |
|
---|
3257 | <listitem>
|
---|
3258 | <para>
|
---|
3259 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3260 | </para>
|
---|
3261 | </listitem>
|
---|
3262 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3263 |
|
---|
3264 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3265 | <term>
|
---|
3266 | <literal>SettingsDialog</literal>
|
---|
3267 | </term>
|
---|
3268 |
|
---|
3269 | <listitem>
|
---|
3270 | <para>
|
---|
3271 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Settings</emphasis>
|
---|
3272 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3273 | </para>
|
---|
3274 | </listitem>
|
---|
3275 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3276 |
|
---|
3277 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3278 | <term>
|
---|
3279 | <literal>TakeSnapshot</literal>
|
---|
3280 | </term>
|
---|
3281 |
|
---|
3282 | <listitem>
|
---|
3283 | <para>
|
---|
3284 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Take
|
---|
3285 | Snapshot...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3286 | </para>
|
---|
3287 | </listitem>
|
---|
3288 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3289 |
|
---|
3290 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3291 | <term>
|
---|
3292 | <literal>InformationDialog</literal>
|
---|
3293 | </term>
|
---|
3294 |
|
---|
3295 | <listitem>
|
---|
3296 | <para>
|
---|
3297 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Session
|
---|
3298 | Information...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3299 | </para>
|
---|
3300 | </listitem>
|
---|
3301 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3302 |
|
---|
3303 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3304 | <term>
|
---|
3305 | <literal>FileManagerDialog</literal>
|
---|
3306 | </term>
|
---|
3307 |
|
---|
3308 | <listitem>
|
---|
3309 | <para>
|
---|
3310 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">File
|
---|
3311 | Manager...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3312 | </para>
|
---|
3313 | </listitem>
|
---|
3314 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3315 |
|
---|
3316 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3317 | <term>
|
---|
3318 | <literal>Pause</literal>
|
---|
3319 | </term>
|
---|
3320 |
|
---|
3321 | <listitem>
|
---|
3322 | <para>
|
---|
3323 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Pause</emphasis>
|
---|
3324 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3325 | </para>
|
---|
3326 | </listitem>
|
---|
3327 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3328 |
|
---|
3329 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3330 | <term>
|
---|
3331 | <literal>Reset</literal>
|
---|
3332 | </term>
|
---|
3333 |
|
---|
3334 | <listitem>
|
---|
3335 | <para>
|
---|
3336 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Reset</emphasis>
|
---|
3337 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3338 | </para>
|
---|
3339 | </listitem>
|
---|
3340 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3341 |
|
---|
3342 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3343 | <term>
|
---|
3344 | <literal>Shutdown</literal>
|
---|
3345 | </term>
|
---|
3346 |
|
---|
3347 | <listitem>
|
---|
3348 | <para>
|
---|
3349 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">ACPI
|
---|
3350 | Shutdown</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3351 | </para>
|
---|
3352 | </listitem>
|
---|
3353 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3354 |
|
---|
3355 | </variablelist>
|
---|
3356 |
|
---|
3357 | <para>
|
---|
3358 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
3359 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use
|
---|
3360 | </para>
|
---|
3361 |
|
---|
3362 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeMachineMenuActions</screen>
|
---|
3363 |
|
---|
3364 | <para>
|
---|
3365 | Use the following command to disable certain actions of the
|
---|
3366 | <emphasis role="bold">View</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
3367 | </para>
|
---|
3368 |
|
---|
3369 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeViewMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3370 |
|
---|
3371 | <para>
|
---|
3372 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following
|
---|
3373 | keywords:
|
---|
3374 | </para>
|
---|
3375 |
|
---|
3376 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3377 |
|
---|
3378 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3379 | <term>
|
---|
3380 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3381 | </term>
|
---|
3382 |
|
---|
3383 | <listitem>
|
---|
3384 | <para>
|
---|
3385 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3386 | </para>
|
---|
3387 | </listitem>
|
---|
3388 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3389 |
|
---|
3390 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3391 | <term>
|
---|
3392 | <literal>Fullscreen</literal>
|
---|
3393 | </term>
|
---|
3394 |
|
---|
3395 | <listitem>
|
---|
3396 | <para>
|
---|
3397 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Full-screen
|
---|
3398 | Mode</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3399 | </para>
|
---|
3400 | </listitem>
|
---|
3401 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3402 |
|
---|
3403 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3404 | <term>
|
---|
3405 | <literal>Seamless</literal>
|
---|
3406 | </term>
|
---|
3407 |
|
---|
3408 | <listitem>
|
---|
3409 | <para>
|
---|
3410 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Seamless
|
---|
3411 | Mode</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3412 | </para>
|
---|
3413 | </listitem>
|
---|
3414 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3415 |
|
---|
3416 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3417 | <term>
|
---|
3418 | <literal>Scale</literal>
|
---|
3419 | </term>
|
---|
3420 |
|
---|
3421 | <listitem>
|
---|
3422 | <para>
|
---|
3423 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Scaled
|
---|
3424 | Mode</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3425 | </para>
|
---|
3426 | </listitem>
|
---|
3427 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3428 |
|
---|
3429 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3430 | <term>
|
---|
3431 | <literal>GuestAutoresize</literal>
|
---|
3432 | </term>
|
---|
3433 |
|
---|
3434 | <listitem>
|
---|
3435 | <para>
|
---|
3436 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Auto-resize Guest
|
---|
3437 | Display</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3438 | </para>
|
---|
3439 | </listitem>
|
---|
3440 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3441 |
|
---|
3442 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3443 | <term>
|
---|
3444 | <literal>AdjustWindow</literal>
|
---|
3445 | </term>
|
---|
3446 |
|
---|
3447 | <listitem>
|
---|
3448 | <para>
|
---|
3449 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Adjust Window
|
---|
3450 | Size</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3451 | </para>
|
---|
3452 | </listitem>
|
---|
3453 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3454 |
|
---|
3455 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3456 | <term>
|
---|
3457 | <literal>TakeScreenshot</literal>
|
---|
3458 | </term>
|
---|
3459 |
|
---|
3460 | <listitem>
|
---|
3461 | <para>
|
---|
3462 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Take
|
---|
3463 | Screenshot...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3464 | </para>
|
---|
3465 | </listitem>
|
---|
3466 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3467 |
|
---|
3468 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3469 | <term>
|
---|
3470 | <literal>Recording</literal>
|
---|
3471 | </term>
|
---|
3472 |
|
---|
3473 | <listitem>
|
---|
3474 | <para>
|
---|
3475 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Recording</emphasis>
|
---|
3476 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3477 | </para>
|
---|
3478 | </listitem>
|
---|
3479 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3480 |
|
---|
3481 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3482 | <term>
|
---|
3483 | <literal>VRDEServer</literal>
|
---|
3484 | </term>
|
---|
3485 |
|
---|
3486 | <listitem>
|
---|
3487 | <para>
|
---|
3488 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Remote
|
---|
3489 | Display</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3490 | </para>
|
---|
3491 | </listitem>
|
---|
3492 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3493 |
|
---|
3494 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3495 | <term>
|
---|
3496 | <literal>MenuBar</literal>
|
---|
3497 | </term>
|
---|
3498 |
|
---|
3499 | <listitem>
|
---|
3500 | <para>
|
---|
3501 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Menu Bar</emphasis>
|
---|
3502 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3503 | </para>
|
---|
3504 | </listitem>
|
---|
3505 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3506 |
|
---|
3507 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3508 | <term>
|
---|
3509 | <literal>MenuBarSettings</literal>
|
---|
3510 | </term>
|
---|
3511 |
|
---|
3512 | <listitem>
|
---|
3513 | <para>
|
---|
3514 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Menu Bar
|
---|
3515 | Settings...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3516 | </para>
|
---|
3517 | </listitem>
|
---|
3518 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3519 |
|
---|
3520 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3521 | <term>
|
---|
3522 | <literal>StatusBar</literal>
|
---|
3523 | </term>
|
---|
3524 |
|
---|
3525 | <listitem>
|
---|
3526 | <para>
|
---|
3527 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Status
|
---|
3528 | Bar</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3529 | </para>
|
---|
3530 | </listitem>
|
---|
3531 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3532 |
|
---|
3533 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3534 | <term>
|
---|
3535 | <literal>StatusbarSettings</literal>
|
---|
3536 | </term>
|
---|
3537 |
|
---|
3538 | <listitem>
|
---|
3539 | <para>
|
---|
3540 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Statusbar
|
---|
3541 | Settings...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3542 | </para>
|
---|
3543 | </listitem>
|
---|
3544 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3545 |
|
---|
3546 | </variablelist>
|
---|
3547 |
|
---|
3548 | <para>
|
---|
3549 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
3550 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use
|
---|
3551 | </para>
|
---|
3552 |
|
---|
3553 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeViewMenuActions</screen>
|
---|
3554 |
|
---|
3555 | <para>
|
---|
3556 | Use the following command to disable certain actions of the
|
---|
3557 | <emphasis role="bold">Input</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
3558 | </para>
|
---|
3559 |
|
---|
3560 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeInputMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3561 |
|
---|
3562 | <para>
|
---|
3563 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following
|
---|
3564 | keywords:
|
---|
3565 | </para>
|
---|
3566 |
|
---|
3567 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3568 |
|
---|
3569 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3570 | <term>
|
---|
3571 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3572 | </term>
|
---|
3573 |
|
---|
3574 | <listitem>
|
---|
3575 | <para>
|
---|
3576 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3577 | </para>
|
---|
3578 | </listitem>
|
---|
3579 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3580 |
|
---|
3581 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3582 | <term>
|
---|
3583 | <literal>Keyboard</literal>
|
---|
3584 | </term>
|
---|
3585 |
|
---|
3586 | <listitem>
|
---|
3587 | <para>
|
---|
3588 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Keyboard</emphasis>
|
---|
3589 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3590 | </para>
|
---|
3591 | </listitem>
|
---|
3592 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3593 |
|
---|
3594 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3595 | <term>
|
---|
3596 | <literal>KeyboardSettings</literal>
|
---|
3597 | </term>
|
---|
3598 |
|
---|
3599 | <listitem>
|
---|
3600 | <para>
|
---|
3601 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Keyboard
|
---|
3602 | Settings...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3603 | </para>
|
---|
3604 | </listitem>
|
---|
3605 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3606 |
|
---|
3607 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3608 | <term>
|
---|
3609 | <literal>SoftKeyboard</literal>
|
---|
3610 | </term>
|
---|
3611 |
|
---|
3612 | <listitem>
|
---|
3613 | <para>
|
---|
3614 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Soft
|
---|
3615 | Keyboard...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3616 | </para>
|
---|
3617 | </listitem>
|
---|
3618 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3619 |
|
---|
3620 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3621 | <term>
|
---|
3622 | <literal>TypeCAD</literal>
|
---|
3623 | </term>
|
---|
3624 |
|
---|
3625 | <listitem>
|
---|
3626 | <para>
|
---|
3627 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert
|
---|
3628 | Ctrl-Alt-Del</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3629 | </para>
|
---|
3630 | </listitem>
|
---|
3631 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3632 |
|
---|
3633 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3634 | <term>
|
---|
3635 | <literal>TypeCABS</literal>
|
---|
3636 | </term>
|
---|
3637 |
|
---|
3638 | <listitem>
|
---|
3639 | <para>
|
---|
3640 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert
|
---|
3641 | Ctrl-Alt-Backspace</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3642 | </para>
|
---|
3643 | </listitem>
|
---|
3644 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3645 |
|
---|
3646 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3647 | <term>
|
---|
3648 | <literal>TypeCtrlBreak</literal>
|
---|
3649 | </term>
|
---|
3650 |
|
---|
3651 | <listitem>
|
---|
3652 | <para>
|
---|
3653 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert
|
---|
3654 | Ctrl-Break</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3655 | </para>
|
---|
3656 | </listitem>
|
---|
3657 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3658 |
|
---|
3659 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3660 | <term>
|
---|
3661 | <literal>TypeInsert</literal>
|
---|
3662 | </term>
|
---|
3663 |
|
---|
3664 | <listitem>
|
---|
3665 | <para>
|
---|
3666 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert
|
---|
3667 | Insert</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3668 | </para>
|
---|
3669 | </listitem>
|
---|
3670 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3671 |
|
---|
3672 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3673 | <term>
|
---|
3674 | <literal>TypePrintScreen</literal>
|
---|
3675 | </term>
|
---|
3676 |
|
---|
3677 | <listitem>
|
---|
3678 | <para>
|
---|
3679 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert Print
|
---|
3680 | Screen</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3681 | </para>
|
---|
3682 | </listitem>
|
---|
3683 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3684 |
|
---|
3685 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3686 | <term>
|
---|
3687 | <literal>TypeAltPrintScreen</literal>
|
---|
3688 | </term>
|
---|
3689 |
|
---|
3690 | <listitem>
|
---|
3691 | <para>
|
---|
3692 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert Alt Print
|
---|
3693 | Screen</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3694 | </para>
|
---|
3695 | </listitem>
|
---|
3696 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3697 |
|
---|
3698 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3699 | <term>
|
---|
3700 | <literal>TypeHostKeyCombo</literal>
|
---|
3701 | </term>
|
---|
3702 |
|
---|
3703 | <listitem>
|
---|
3704 | <para>
|
---|
3705 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert Host Key
|
---|
3706 | Combo</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3707 | </para>
|
---|
3708 | </listitem>
|
---|
3709 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3710 |
|
---|
3711 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3712 | <term>
|
---|
3713 | <literal>MouseIntegration</literal>
|
---|
3714 | </term>
|
---|
3715 |
|
---|
3716 | <listitem>
|
---|
3717 | <para>
|
---|
3718 | Do not show the
|
---|
3719 | <emphasis role="bold">MouseIntegration</emphasis> menu
|
---|
3720 | item in this menu.
|
---|
3721 | </para>
|
---|
3722 | </listitem>
|
---|
3723 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3724 |
|
---|
3725 | </variablelist>
|
---|
3726 |
|
---|
3727 | <para>
|
---|
3728 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
3729 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use
|
---|
3730 | </para>
|
---|
3731 |
|
---|
3732 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeInputMenuActions</screen>
|
---|
3733 |
|
---|
3734 | <para>
|
---|
3735 | Use the following command to disable certain actions of the
|
---|
3736 | <emphasis role="bold">Devices</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
3737 | </para>
|
---|
3738 |
|
---|
3739 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeDevicesMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3740 |
|
---|
3741 | <para>
|
---|
3742 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following keywords
|
---|
3743 | to disable actions in the
|
---|
3744 | <emphasis role="bold">Devices</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
3745 | </para>
|
---|
3746 |
|
---|
3747 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3748 |
|
---|
3749 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3750 | <term>
|
---|
3751 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3752 | </term>
|
---|
3753 |
|
---|
3754 | <listitem>
|
---|
3755 | <para>
|
---|
3756 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3757 | </para>
|
---|
3758 | </listitem>
|
---|
3759 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3760 |
|
---|
3761 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3762 | <term>
|
---|
3763 | <literal>HardDrives</literal>
|
---|
3764 | </term>
|
---|
3765 |
|
---|
3766 | <listitem>
|
---|
3767 | <para>
|
---|
3768 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Hard
|
---|
3769 | Disks</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3770 | </para>
|
---|
3771 | </listitem>
|
---|
3772 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3773 |
|
---|
3774 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3775 | <term>
|
---|
3776 | <literal>OpticalDevices</literal>
|
---|
3777 | </term>
|
---|
3778 |
|
---|
3779 | <listitem>
|
---|
3780 | <para>
|
---|
3781 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Optical
|
---|
3782 | Devices</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3783 | </para>
|
---|
3784 | </listitem>
|
---|
3785 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3786 |
|
---|
3787 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3788 | <term>
|
---|
3789 | <literal>FloppyDevices</literal>
|
---|
3790 | </term>
|
---|
3791 |
|
---|
3792 | <listitem>
|
---|
3793 | <para>
|
---|
3794 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Floppy
|
---|
3795 | Drives</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3796 | </para>
|
---|
3797 | </listitem>
|
---|
3798 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3799 |
|
---|
3800 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3801 | <term>
|
---|
3802 | <literal>Audio</literal>
|
---|
3803 | </term>
|
---|
3804 |
|
---|
3805 | <listitem>
|
---|
3806 | <para>
|
---|
3807 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Audio</emphasis>
|
---|
3808 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3809 | </para>
|
---|
3810 | </listitem>
|
---|
3811 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3812 |
|
---|
3813 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3814 | <term>
|
---|
3815 | <literal>Network</literal>
|
---|
3816 | </term>
|
---|
3817 |
|
---|
3818 | <listitem>
|
---|
3819 | <para>
|
---|
3820 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Network</emphasis>
|
---|
3821 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3822 | </para>
|
---|
3823 | </listitem>
|
---|
3824 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3825 |
|
---|
3826 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3827 | <term>
|
---|
3828 | <literal>NetworkSettings</literal>
|
---|
3829 | </term>
|
---|
3830 |
|
---|
3831 | <listitem>
|
---|
3832 | <para>
|
---|
3833 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Network
|
---|
3834 | Settings</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3835 | </para>
|
---|
3836 | </listitem>
|
---|
3837 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3838 |
|
---|
3839 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3840 | <term>
|
---|
3841 | <literal>USBDevices</literal>
|
---|
3842 | </term>
|
---|
3843 |
|
---|
3844 | <listitem>
|
---|
3845 | <para>
|
---|
3846 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">USB </emphasis> menu
|
---|
3847 | item in this menu.
|
---|
3848 | </para>
|
---|
3849 | </listitem>
|
---|
3850 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3851 |
|
---|
3852 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3853 | <term>
|
---|
3854 | <literal>WebCams</literal>
|
---|
3855 | </term>
|
---|
3856 |
|
---|
3857 | <listitem>
|
---|
3858 | <para>
|
---|
3859 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">WebCams </emphasis>
|
---|
3860 | menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3861 | </para>
|
---|
3862 | </listitem>
|
---|
3863 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3864 |
|
---|
3865 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3866 | <term>
|
---|
3867 | <literal>SharedFolders</literal>
|
---|
3868 | </term>
|
---|
3869 |
|
---|
3870 | <listitem>
|
---|
3871 | <para>
|
---|
3872 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Shared
|
---|
3873 | Folders</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3874 | </para>
|
---|
3875 | </listitem>
|
---|
3876 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3877 |
|
---|
3878 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3879 | <term>
|
---|
3880 | <literal>SharedFoldersSettings</literal>
|
---|
3881 | </term>
|
---|
3882 |
|
---|
3883 | <listitem>
|
---|
3884 | <para>
|
---|
3885 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Shared Folders
|
---|
3886 | Settings...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3887 | </para>
|
---|
3888 | </listitem>
|
---|
3889 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3890 |
|
---|
3891 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3892 | <term>
|
---|
3893 | <literal>SharedClipboard</literal>
|
---|
3894 | </term>
|
---|
3895 |
|
---|
3896 | <listitem>
|
---|
3897 | <para>
|
---|
3898 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Shared
|
---|
3899 | Clipboard</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3900 | </para>
|
---|
3901 | </listitem>
|
---|
3902 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3903 |
|
---|
3904 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3905 | <term>
|
---|
3906 | <literal>DragAndDrop</literal>
|
---|
3907 | </term>
|
---|
3908 |
|
---|
3909 | <listitem>
|
---|
3910 | <para>
|
---|
3911 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Drag and
|
---|
3912 | Drop</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3913 | </para>
|
---|
3914 | </listitem>
|
---|
3915 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3916 |
|
---|
3917 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3918 | <term>
|
---|
3919 | <literal>InstallGuestTools</literal>
|
---|
3920 | </term>
|
---|
3921 |
|
---|
3922 | <listitem>
|
---|
3923 | <para>
|
---|
3924 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Insert Guest
|
---|
3925 | Additions CD image...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3926 | </para>
|
---|
3927 | </listitem>
|
---|
3928 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3929 |
|
---|
3930 | </variablelist>
|
---|
3931 |
|
---|
3932 | <para>
|
---|
3933 | This is a per-VM or global or global setting. Any combination of
|
---|
3934 | the above is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use
|
---|
3935 | </para>
|
---|
3936 |
|
---|
3937 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeDevicesMenuActions</screen>
|
---|
3938 |
|
---|
3939 | <para>
|
---|
3940 | Use the following command to disable certain actions of the
|
---|
3941 | <emphasis role="bold">Debug</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
3942 | </para>
|
---|
3943 |
|
---|
3944 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeDebuggerMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
3945 |
|
---|
3946 | <para>
|
---|
3947 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following keywords
|
---|
3948 | to disable actions in the <emphasis>Debug</emphasis> menu, which
|
---|
3949 | is normally completely disabled:
|
---|
3950 | </para>
|
---|
3951 |
|
---|
3952 | <variablelist>
|
---|
3953 |
|
---|
3954 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3955 | <term>
|
---|
3956 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
3957 | </term>
|
---|
3958 |
|
---|
3959 | <listitem>
|
---|
3960 | <para>
|
---|
3961 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3962 | </para>
|
---|
3963 | </listitem>
|
---|
3964 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3965 |
|
---|
3966 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3967 | <term>
|
---|
3968 | <literal>Statistics</literal>
|
---|
3969 | </term>
|
---|
3970 |
|
---|
3971 | <listitem>
|
---|
3972 | <para>
|
---|
3973 | Do not show the
|
---|
3974 | <emphasis role="bold">Statistics...</emphasis> menu item
|
---|
3975 | in this menu.
|
---|
3976 | </para>
|
---|
3977 | </listitem>
|
---|
3978 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3979 |
|
---|
3980 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3981 | <term>
|
---|
3982 | <literal>CommandLine</literal>
|
---|
3983 | </term>
|
---|
3984 |
|
---|
3985 | <listitem>
|
---|
3986 | <para>
|
---|
3987 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Command
|
---|
3988 | Line...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
3989 | </para>
|
---|
3990 | </listitem>
|
---|
3991 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
3992 |
|
---|
3993 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
3994 | <term>
|
---|
3995 | <literal>Logging</literal>
|
---|
3996 | </term>
|
---|
3997 |
|
---|
3998 | <listitem>
|
---|
3999 | <para>
|
---|
4000 | Do not show the
|
---|
4001 | <emphasis role="bold">Logging...</emphasis> menu item in
|
---|
4002 | this menu.
|
---|
4003 | </para>
|
---|
4004 | </listitem>
|
---|
4005 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4006 |
|
---|
4007 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4008 | <term>
|
---|
4009 | <literal>LogDialog</literal>
|
---|
4010 | </term>
|
---|
4011 |
|
---|
4012 | <listitem>
|
---|
4013 | <para>
|
---|
4014 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Show
|
---|
4015 | Log...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4016 | </para>
|
---|
4017 | </listitem>
|
---|
4018 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4019 |
|
---|
4020 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4021 | <term>
|
---|
4022 | <literal>GuestControlConsole</literal>
|
---|
4023 | </term>
|
---|
4024 |
|
---|
4025 | <listitem>
|
---|
4026 | <para>
|
---|
4027 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Guest Control
|
---|
4028 | Terminal...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4029 | </para>
|
---|
4030 | </listitem>
|
---|
4031 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4032 |
|
---|
4033 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4034 |
|
---|
4035 | <para>
|
---|
4036 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
4037 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use
|
---|
4038 | </para>
|
---|
4039 |
|
---|
4040 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeDebuggerMenuActions</screen>
|
---|
4041 |
|
---|
4042 | <para>
|
---|
4043 | Use the following command to disable certain actions of the
|
---|
4044 | <emphasis role="bold">View</emphasis> menu:
|
---|
4045 | </para>
|
---|
4046 |
|
---|
4047 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeHelpMenuActions OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
4048 |
|
---|
4049 | <para>
|
---|
4050 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following keywords
|
---|
4051 | to disable actions in the <emphasis role="bold">Help</emphasis>
|
---|
4052 | menu, which is normally completely disabled:
|
---|
4053 | </para>
|
---|
4054 |
|
---|
4055 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4056 |
|
---|
4057 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4058 | <term>
|
---|
4059 | <literal>All</literal>
|
---|
4060 | </term>
|
---|
4061 |
|
---|
4062 | <listitem>
|
---|
4063 | <para>
|
---|
4064 | Do not show any menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4065 | </para>
|
---|
4066 | </listitem>
|
---|
4067 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4068 |
|
---|
4069 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4070 | <term>
|
---|
4071 | <literal>Contents</literal>
|
---|
4072 | </term>
|
---|
4073 |
|
---|
4074 | <listitem>
|
---|
4075 | <para>
|
---|
4076 | Do not show the
|
---|
4077 | <emphasis role="bold">Contents...</emphasis> menu item in
|
---|
4078 | this menu.
|
---|
4079 | </para>
|
---|
4080 | </listitem>
|
---|
4081 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4082 |
|
---|
4083 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4084 | <term>
|
---|
4085 | <literal>WebSite</literal>
|
---|
4086 | </term>
|
---|
4087 |
|
---|
4088 | <listitem>
|
---|
4089 | <para>
|
---|
4090 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">VirtualBox Web
|
---|
4091 | Site...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4092 | </para>
|
---|
4093 | </listitem>
|
---|
4094 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4095 |
|
---|
4096 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4097 | <term>
|
---|
4098 | <literal>BugTracker</literal>
|
---|
4099 | </term>
|
---|
4100 |
|
---|
4101 | <listitem>
|
---|
4102 | <para>
|
---|
4103 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">VirtualBox Bug
|
---|
4104 | Tracker...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4105 | </para>
|
---|
4106 | </listitem>
|
---|
4107 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4108 |
|
---|
4109 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4110 | <term>
|
---|
4111 | <literal>Forums</literal>
|
---|
4112 | </term>
|
---|
4113 |
|
---|
4114 | <listitem>
|
---|
4115 | <para>
|
---|
4116 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">VirtualBox
|
---|
4117 | Forums...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4118 | </para>
|
---|
4119 | </listitem>
|
---|
4120 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4121 |
|
---|
4122 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4123 | <term>
|
---|
4124 | <literal>Oracle</literal>
|
---|
4125 | </term>
|
---|
4126 |
|
---|
4127 | <listitem>
|
---|
4128 | <para>
|
---|
4129 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">Oracle Web
|
---|
4130 | Site...</emphasis> menu item in this menu.
|
---|
4131 | </para>
|
---|
4132 | </listitem>
|
---|
4133 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4134 |
|
---|
4135 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4136 | <term>
|
---|
4137 | <literal>About</literal>
|
---|
4138 | </term>
|
---|
4139 |
|
---|
4140 | <listitem>
|
---|
4141 | <para>
|
---|
4142 | Do not show the <emphasis role="bold">About
|
---|
4143 | VirtualBox...</emphasis> menu item in this menu. Only for
|
---|
4144 | non-Mac OS X hosts.
|
---|
4145 | </para>
|
---|
4146 | </listitem>
|
---|
4147 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4148 |
|
---|
4149 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4150 |
|
---|
4151 | <para>
|
---|
4152 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
4153 | is allowed. To restore the default behavior, use
|
---|
4154 | </para>
|
---|
4155 |
|
---|
4156 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedRuntimeHelpMenuActions</screen>
|
---|
4157 |
|
---|
4158 | </sect2>
|
---|
4159 |
|
---|
4160 | <sect2 id="config-vm-window-status-bar">
|
---|
4161 |
|
---|
4162 | <title>Configure VM Window Status Bar Entries</title>
|
---|
4163 |
|
---|
4164 | <para>
|
---|
4165 | You can disable, or blacklist, certain status bar items:
|
---|
4166 | </para>
|
---|
4167 |
|
---|
4168 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedStatusBarIndicators OPTION[,OPTION...]</screen>
|
---|
4169 |
|
---|
4170 | <para>
|
---|
4171 | where <literal>OPTION</literal> is one of the following
|
---|
4172 | keywords:
|
---|
4173 | </para>
|
---|
4174 |
|
---|
4175 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4176 |
|
---|
4177 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4178 | <term>
|
---|
4179 | <literal>HardDisks</literal>
|
---|
4180 | </term>
|
---|
4181 |
|
---|
4182 | <listitem>
|
---|
4183 | <para>
|
---|
4184 | Do not show the hard disk icon in the VM window status
|
---|
4185 | bar. By default the hard disk icon is only shown if the VM
|
---|
4186 | configuration contains one or more hard disks.
|
---|
4187 | </para>
|
---|
4188 | </listitem>
|
---|
4189 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4190 |
|
---|
4191 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4192 | <term>
|
---|
4193 | <literal>OpticalDisks</literal>
|
---|
4194 | </term>
|
---|
4195 |
|
---|
4196 | <listitem>
|
---|
4197 | <para>
|
---|
4198 | Do not show the CD icon in the VM window status bar. By
|
---|
4199 | default the CD icon is only shown if the VM configuration
|
---|
4200 | contains one or more CD drives.
|
---|
4201 | </para>
|
---|
4202 | </listitem>
|
---|
4203 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4204 |
|
---|
4205 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4206 | <term>
|
---|
4207 | <literal>FloppyDisks</literal>
|
---|
4208 | </term>
|
---|
4209 |
|
---|
4210 | <listitem>
|
---|
4211 | <para>
|
---|
4212 | Do not show the floppy icon in the VM window status bar.
|
---|
4213 | By default the floppy icon is only shown if the VM
|
---|
4214 | configuration contains one or more floppy drives.
|
---|
4215 | </para>
|
---|
4216 | </listitem>
|
---|
4217 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4218 |
|
---|
4219 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4220 | <term>
|
---|
4221 | <literal>Network</literal>
|
---|
4222 | </term>
|
---|
4223 |
|
---|
4224 | <listitem>
|
---|
4225 | <para>
|
---|
4226 | Do not show the network icon in the VM window status bar.
|
---|
4227 | By default the network icon is only shown if the VM
|
---|
4228 | configuration contains one or more active network
|
---|
4229 | adapters.
|
---|
4230 | </para>
|
---|
4231 | </listitem>
|
---|
4232 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4233 |
|
---|
4234 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4235 | <term>
|
---|
4236 | <literal>USB</literal>
|
---|
4237 | </term>
|
---|
4238 |
|
---|
4239 | <listitem>
|
---|
4240 | <para>
|
---|
4241 | Do not show the USB icon in the status bar.
|
---|
4242 | </para>
|
---|
4243 | </listitem>
|
---|
4244 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4245 |
|
---|
4246 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4247 | <term>
|
---|
4248 | <literal>SharedFolders</literal>
|
---|
4249 | </term>
|
---|
4250 |
|
---|
4251 | <listitem>
|
---|
4252 | <para>
|
---|
4253 | Do not show the shared folders icon in the status bar.
|
---|
4254 | </para>
|
---|
4255 | </listitem>
|
---|
4256 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4257 |
|
---|
4258 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4259 | <term>
|
---|
4260 | <literal>Capture</literal>
|
---|
4261 | </term>
|
---|
4262 |
|
---|
4263 | <listitem>
|
---|
4264 | <para>
|
---|
4265 | Do not show the capture icon in the status bar.
|
---|
4266 | </para>
|
---|
4267 | </listitem>
|
---|
4268 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4269 |
|
---|
4270 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4271 | <term>
|
---|
4272 | <literal>Features</literal>
|
---|
4273 | </term>
|
---|
4274 |
|
---|
4275 | <listitem>
|
---|
4276 | <para>
|
---|
4277 | Do not show the CPU features icon in the status bar.
|
---|
4278 | </para>
|
---|
4279 | </listitem>
|
---|
4280 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4281 |
|
---|
4282 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4283 | <term>
|
---|
4284 | <literal>Mouse</literal>
|
---|
4285 | </term>
|
---|
4286 |
|
---|
4287 | <listitem>
|
---|
4288 | <para>
|
---|
4289 | Do not show the mouse icon in the status bar.
|
---|
4290 | </para>
|
---|
4291 | </listitem>
|
---|
4292 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4293 |
|
---|
4294 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4295 | <term>
|
---|
4296 | <literal>Keyboard</literal>
|
---|
4297 | </term>
|
---|
4298 |
|
---|
4299 | <listitem>
|
---|
4300 | <para>
|
---|
4301 | Do not show the keyboard icon in the status bar.
|
---|
4302 | </para>
|
---|
4303 | </listitem>
|
---|
4304 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4305 |
|
---|
4306 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4307 |
|
---|
4308 | <para>
|
---|
4309 | This is a per-VM or global setting. Any combination of the above
|
---|
4310 | is allowed. If all options are specified, no icons are displayed
|
---|
4311 | in the status bar of the VM window. To restore the default
|
---|
4312 | behavior, use
|
---|
4313 | </para>
|
---|
4314 |
|
---|
4315 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata "VM name"|global GUI/RestrictedStatusBarIndicators</screen>
|
---|
4316 |
|
---|
4317 | </sect2>
|
---|
4318 |
|
---|
4319 | <sect2 id="config-vm-window-visual-modes">
|
---|
4320 |
|
---|
4321 | <title>Configure VM Window Visual Modes</title>
|
---|
4322 |
|
---|
4323 | <para>
|
---|
4324 | You can disable, or blacklist, certain VM visual modes:
|
---|
4325 | </para>
|
---|
4326 |
|
---|
4327 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/RestrictedVisualStates <replaceable>property</replaceable>[,<replaceable>property</replaceable>...]</screen>
|
---|
4328 |
|
---|
4329 | <para>
|
---|
4330 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
4331 | </para>
|
---|
4332 |
|
---|
4333 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4334 |
|
---|
4335 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4336 | <term>
|
---|
4337 | <literal>Fullscreen</literal>
|
---|
4338 | </term>
|
---|
4339 |
|
---|
4340 | <listitem>
|
---|
4341 | <para>
|
---|
4342 | Do not allow to switch the VM into full screen mode.
|
---|
4343 | </para>
|
---|
4344 | </listitem>
|
---|
4345 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4346 |
|
---|
4347 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4348 | <term>
|
---|
4349 | <literal>Seamless</literal>
|
---|
4350 | </term>
|
---|
4351 |
|
---|
4352 | <listitem>
|
---|
4353 | <para>
|
---|
4354 | Do not allow to switch the VM into seamless mode.
|
---|
4355 | </para>
|
---|
4356 | </listitem>
|
---|
4357 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4358 |
|
---|
4359 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4360 | <term>
|
---|
4361 | <literal>Scale</literal>
|
---|
4362 | </term>
|
---|
4363 |
|
---|
4364 | <listitem>
|
---|
4365 | <para>
|
---|
4366 | Do not allow to switch the VM into scale mode.
|
---|
4367 | </para>
|
---|
4368 | </listitem>
|
---|
4369 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4370 |
|
---|
4371 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4372 |
|
---|
4373 | <para>
|
---|
4374 | This is a per-VM setting. You can specify any combination of
|
---|
4375 | properties. To restore the default behavior, use the following
|
---|
4376 | command:
|
---|
4377 | </para>
|
---|
4378 |
|
---|
4379 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/RestrictedVisualStates</screen>
|
---|
4380 |
|
---|
4381 | </sect2>
|
---|
4382 |
|
---|
4383 | <sect2 id="host-key-customize">
|
---|
4384 |
|
---|
4385 | <title>Host Key Customization</title>
|
---|
4386 |
|
---|
4387 | <para>
|
---|
4388 | To disable all Host key combinations, open the preferences and
|
---|
4389 | change the Host key to None. This might be useful when using
|
---|
4390 | &product-name; in a kiosk mode.
|
---|
4391 | </para>
|
---|
4392 |
|
---|
4393 | <para>
|
---|
4394 | To redefine or disable certain Host key actions, use the
|
---|
4395 | following command:
|
---|
4396 | </para>
|
---|
4397 |
|
---|
4398 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/Input/MachineShortcuts "FullscreenMode=F,...."</screen>
|
---|
4399 |
|
---|
4400 | <para>
|
---|
4401 | The following table shows the possible Host key actions,
|
---|
4402 | together with their default Host key shortcut. Setting an action
|
---|
4403 | to None will disable that Host key action.
|
---|
4404 | </para>
|
---|
4405 |
|
---|
4406 | <table id="table-host-key-customize" tabstyle="oracle-all">
|
---|
4407 | <title>Host Key Customization</title>
|
---|
4408 | <tgroup cols="3">
|
---|
4409 | <thead>
|
---|
4410 | <row>
|
---|
4411 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4412 | <emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis>
|
---|
4413 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4414 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4415 | <emphasis role="bold">Default Key</emphasis>
|
---|
4416 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4417 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4418 | <emphasis role="bold">Action</emphasis>
|
---|
4419 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4420 | </row>
|
---|
4421 | </thead>
|
---|
4422 | <tbody>
|
---|
4423 | <row>
|
---|
4424 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4425 | <literal>TakeSnapshot</literal>
|
---|
4426 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4427 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4428 | T
|
---|
4429 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4430 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4431 | Take a snapshot
|
---|
4432 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4433 | </row>
|
---|
4434 | <row>
|
---|
4435 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4436 | <literal>TakeScreenshot</literal>
|
---|
4437 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4438 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4439 | E
|
---|
4440 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4441 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4442 | Take a screenshot
|
---|
4443 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4444 | </row>
|
---|
4445 | <row>
|
---|
4446 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4447 | <literal>MouseIntegration</literal>
|
---|
4448 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4449 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4450 | I
|
---|
4451 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4452 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4453 | Toggle mouse integration
|
---|
4454 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4455 | </row>
|
---|
4456 | <row>
|
---|
4457 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4458 | <literal>TypeCAD</literal>
|
---|
4459 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4460 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4461 | Del
|
---|
4462 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4463 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4464 | Inject Ctrl+Alt+Del
|
---|
4465 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4466 | </row>
|
---|
4467 | <row>
|
---|
4468 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4469 | <literal>TypeCABS</literal>
|
---|
4470 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4471 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4472 | Backspace
|
---|
4473 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4474 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4475 | Inject Ctrl+Alt+Backspace
|
---|
4476 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4477 | </row>
|
---|
4478 | <row>
|
---|
4479 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4480 | <literal>Pause</literal>
|
---|
4481 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4482 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4483 | P
|
---|
4484 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4485 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4486 | Pause the VM
|
---|
4487 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4488 | </row>
|
---|
4489 | <row>
|
---|
4490 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4491 | <literal>Reset</literal>
|
---|
4492 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4493 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4494 | R
|
---|
4495 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4496 | <entry>Hard reset the guest</entry>
|
---|
4497 | </row>
|
---|
4498 | <row>
|
---|
4499 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4500 | <literal>SaveState</literal>
|
---|
4501 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4502 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
4503 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4504 | Save the VM state and terminate the VM
|
---|
4505 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4506 | </row>
|
---|
4507 | <row>
|
---|
4508 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4509 | <literal>Shutdown</literal>
|
---|
4510 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4511 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4512 | H
|
---|
4513 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4514 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4515 | Press the virtual ACPI power button
|
---|
4516 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4517 | </row>
|
---|
4518 | <row>
|
---|
4519 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4520 | <literal>PowerOff</literal>
|
---|
4521 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4522 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
4523 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4524 | Power off the VM without saving the state
|
---|
4525 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4526 | </row>
|
---|
4527 | <row>
|
---|
4528 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4529 | <literal>Close</literal>
|
---|
4530 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4531 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4532 | Q
|
---|
4533 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4534 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4535 | Show the Close VM dialog
|
---|
4536 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4537 | </row>
|
---|
4538 | <row>
|
---|
4539 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4540 | <literal>FullscreenMode</literal>
|
---|
4541 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4542 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4543 | F
|
---|
4544 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4545 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4546 | Switch the VM into full screen mode
|
---|
4547 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4548 | </row>
|
---|
4549 | <row>
|
---|
4550 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4551 | <literal>SeamlessMode</literal>
|
---|
4552 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4553 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4554 | L
|
---|
4555 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4556 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4557 | Switch the VM into seamless mode
|
---|
4558 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4559 | </row>
|
---|
4560 | <row>
|
---|
4561 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4562 | <literal>ScaleMode</literal>
|
---|
4563 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4564 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4565 | C
|
---|
4566 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4567 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4568 | Switch the VM into scaled mode
|
---|
4569 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4570 | </row>
|
---|
4571 | <row>
|
---|
4572 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4573 | <literal>GuestAutoResize</literal>
|
---|
4574 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4575 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4576 | G
|
---|
4577 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4578 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4579 | Automatically resize the guest window
|
---|
4580 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4581 | </row>
|
---|
4582 | <row>
|
---|
4583 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4584 | <literal>WindowAdjust</literal>
|
---|
4585 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4586 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4587 | A
|
---|
4588 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4589 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4590 | Immediately resize the guest window
|
---|
4591 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4592 | </row>
|
---|
4593 | <row>
|
---|
4594 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4595 | <literal>PopupMenu</literal>
|
---|
4596 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4597 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4598 | Home
|
---|
4599 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4600 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4601 | Show the popup menu in full screen mode and seamless
|
---|
4602 | mode
|
---|
4603 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4604 | </row>
|
---|
4605 | <row>
|
---|
4606 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4607 | <literal>SettingsDialog</literal>
|
---|
4608 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4609 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4610 | S
|
---|
4611 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4612 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4613 | Open the VM Settings dialog
|
---|
4614 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4615 | </row>
|
---|
4616 | <row>
|
---|
4617 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4618 | <literal>InformationDialog</literal>
|
---|
4619 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4620 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4621 | N
|
---|
4622 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4623 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4624 | Show the VM Session Information window
|
---|
4625 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4626 | </row>
|
---|
4627 | <row>
|
---|
4628 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4629 | <literal>NetworkAdaptersDialog</literal>
|
---|
4630 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4631 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
4632 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4633 | Show the VM Network Adapters dialog
|
---|
4634 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4635 | </row>
|
---|
4636 | <row>
|
---|
4637 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4638 | <literal>SharedFoldersDialog</literal>
|
---|
4639 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4640 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
4641 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4642 | Show the VM Shared Folders dialog
|
---|
4643 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4644 | </row>
|
---|
4645 | <row>
|
---|
4646 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4647 | <literal>InstallGuestAdditions</literal>
|
---|
4648 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4649 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4650 | D
|
---|
4651 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4652 | <entry><para>
|
---|
4653 | Mount the ISO containing the Guest Additions
|
---|
4654 | </para></entry>
|
---|
4655 | </row>
|
---|
4656 | </tbody>
|
---|
4657 | </tgroup>
|
---|
4658 | </table>
|
---|
4659 |
|
---|
4660 | <para>
|
---|
4661 | To disable full screen mode and seamless mode, use the following
|
---|
4662 | command:
|
---|
4663 | </para>
|
---|
4664 |
|
---|
4665 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/Input/MachineShortcuts "FullscreenMode=None,SeamlessMode=None"</screen>
|
---|
4666 |
|
---|
4667 | </sect2>
|
---|
4668 |
|
---|
4669 | <sect2 id="terminate-vm-action">
|
---|
4670 |
|
---|
4671 | <title>Action when Terminating the VM</title>
|
---|
4672 |
|
---|
4673 | <para>
|
---|
4674 | You can disallow, or blacklist, certain actions when terminating
|
---|
4675 | a VM. To disallow specific actions, use the following command:
|
---|
4676 | </para>
|
---|
4677 |
|
---|
4678 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/RestrictedCloseActions <replaceable>property</replaceable>[,<replaceable>property</replaceable>...]</screen>
|
---|
4679 |
|
---|
4680 | <para>
|
---|
4681 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
4682 | </para>
|
---|
4683 |
|
---|
4684 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4685 |
|
---|
4686 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4687 | <term>
|
---|
4688 | <literal>SaveState</literal>
|
---|
4689 | </term>
|
---|
4690 |
|
---|
4691 | <listitem>
|
---|
4692 | <para>
|
---|
4693 | Do not allow the user to save the VM state when
|
---|
4694 | terminating the VM.
|
---|
4695 | </para>
|
---|
4696 | </listitem>
|
---|
4697 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4698 |
|
---|
4699 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4700 | <term>
|
---|
4701 | <literal>Shutdown</literal>
|
---|
4702 | </term>
|
---|
4703 |
|
---|
4704 | <listitem>
|
---|
4705 | <para>
|
---|
4706 | Do not allow the user to shutdown the VM by sending the
|
---|
4707 | ACPI power-off event to the guest.
|
---|
4708 | </para>
|
---|
4709 | </listitem>
|
---|
4710 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4711 |
|
---|
4712 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4713 | <term>
|
---|
4714 | <literal>PowerOff</literal>
|
---|
4715 | </term>
|
---|
4716 |
|
---|
4717 | <listitem>
|
---|
4718 | <para>
|
---|
4719 | Do not allow the user to power off the VM.
|
---|
4720 | </para>
|
---|
4721 | </listitem>
|
---|
4722 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4723 |
|
---|
4724 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4725 | <term>
|
---|
4726 | <literal>PowerOffRestoringSnapshot</literal>
|
---|
4727 | </term>
|
---|
4728 |
|
---|
4729 | <listitem>
|
---|
4730 | <para>
|
---|
4731 | Do not allow the user to return to the last snapshot when
|
---|
4732 | powering off the VM.
|
---|
4733 | </para>
|
---|
4734 | </listitem>
|
---|
4735 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4736 |
|
---|
4737 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4738 | <term>
|
---|
4739 | <literal>Detach</literal>
|
---|
4740 | </term>
|
---|
4741 |
|
---|
4742 | <listitem>
|
---|
4743 | <para>
|
---|
4744 | Do not allow the user to detach from the VM process if the
|
---|
4745 | VM was started in separate mode.
|
---|
4746 | </para>
|
---|
4747 | </listitem>
|
---|
4748 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4749 |
|
---|
4750 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4751 |
|
---|
4752 | <para>
|
---|
4753 | This is a per-VM setting. You can specify any combination of
|
---|
4754 | properties. If all properties are specified, the VM cannot be
|
---|
4755 | shut down.
|
---|
4756 | </para>
|
---|
4757 |
|
---|
4758 | </sect2>
|
---|
4759 |
|
---|
4760 | <sect2 id="terminate-vm-default-action">
|
---|
4761 |
|
---|
4762 | <title>Default Action when Terminating the VM</title>
|
---|
4763 |
|
---|
4764 | <para>
|
---|
4765 | You can define a specific action for terminating a VM. In
|
---|
4766 | contrast to the setting decribed in the previous section, this
|
---|
4767 | setting allows only one action when the user terminates the VM.
|
---|
4768 | No exit menu is shown. Use the following command:
|
---|
4769 | </para>
|
---|
4770 |
|
---|
4771 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/DefaultCloseAction <replaceable>action</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
4772 |
|
---|
4773 | <para>
|
---|
4774 | <replaceable>action</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
4775 | </para>
|
---|
4776 |
|
---|
4777 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4778 |
|
---|
4779 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4780 | <term>
|
---|
4781 | <literal>SaveState</literal>
|
---|
4782 | </term>
|
---|
4783 |
|
---|
4784 | <listitem>
|
---|
4785 | <para>
|
---|
4786 | Save the VM state before terminating the VM process.
|
---|
4787 | </para>
|
---|
4788 | </listitem>
|
---|
4789 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4790 |
|
---|
4791 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4792 | <term>
|
---|
4793 | <literal>Shutdown</literal>
|
---|
4794 | </term>
|
---|
4795 |
|
---|
4796 | <listitem>
|
---|
4797 | <para>
|
---|
4798 | The VM is shut down by sending the ACPI power-off event to
|
---|
4799 | the guest.
|
---|
4800 | </para>
|
---|
4801 | </listitem>
|
---|
4802 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4803 |
|
---|
4804 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4805 | <term>
|
---|
4806 | <literal>PowerOff</literal>
|
---|
4807 | </term>
|
---|
4808 |
|
---|
4809 | <listitem>
|
---|
4810 | <para>
|
---|
4811 | The VM is powered off.
|
---|
4812 | </para>
|
---|
4813 | </listitem>
|
---|
4814 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4815 |
|
---|
4816 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4817 | <term>
|
---|
4818 | <literal>PowerOffRestoringSnapshot</literal>
|
---|
4819 | </term>
|
---|
4820 |
|
---|
4821 | <listitem>
|
---|
4822 | <para>
|
---|
4823 | The VM is powered off and the saved state returns to the
|
---|
4824 | last snapshot.
|
---|
4825 | </para>
|
---|
4826 | </listitem>
|
---|
4827 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4828 |
|
---|
4829 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4830 | <term>
|
---|
4831 | <literal>Detach</literal>
|
---|
4832 | </term>
|
---|
4833 |
|
---|
4834 | <listitem>
|
---|
4835 | <para>
|
---|
4836 | Terminate the frontend but leave the VM process running.
|
---|
4837 | </para>
|
---|
4838 | </listitem>
|
---|
4839 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4840 |
|
---|
4841 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4842 |
|
---|
4843 | <para>
|
---|
4844 | This is a per-VM setting. You can specify any combination of
|
---|
4845 | properties. If all properties are specified, the VM cannot be
|
---|
4846 | shut down.
|
---|
4847 | </para>
|
---|
4848 |
|
---|
4849 | </sect2>
|
---|
4850 |
|
---|
4851 | <sect2 id="guru-meditation-action">
|
---|
4852 |
|
---|
4853 | <title>Action for Handling a Guru Meditation</title>
|
---|
4854 |
|
---|
4855 | <para>
|
---|
4856 | A VM runs into a Guru Meditation if there is a problem which
|
---|
4857 | cannot be fixed by other means than terminating the process. The
|
---|
4858 | default is to show a message window which instructs the user to
|
---|
4859 | open a bug report.
|
---|
4860 | </para>
|
---|
4861 |
|
---|
4862 | <para>
|
---|
4863 | This behavior can be configured as follows:
|
---|
4864 | </para>
|
---|
4865 |
|
---|
4866 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/GuruMeditationHandler <replaceable>mode</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
4867 |
|
---|
4868 | <para>
|
---|
4869 | <replaceable>mode</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
4870 | </para>
|
---|
4871 |
|
---|
4872 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4873 |
|
---|
4874 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4875 | <term>
|
---|
4876 | <literal>Default</literal>
|
---|
4877 | </term>
|
---|
4878 |
|
---|
4879 | <listitem>
|
---|
4880 | <para>
|
---|
4881 | A message window is shown. After the user confirmed, the
|
---|
4882 | VM is terminated.
|
---|
4883 | </para>
|
---|
4884 | </listitem>
|
---|
4885 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4886 |
|
---|
4887 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4888 | <term>
|
---|
4889 | <literal>PowerOff</literal>
|
---|
4890 | </term>
|
---|
4891 |
|
---|
4892 | <listitem>
|
---|
4893 | <para>
|
---|
4894 | The VM is immediately powered-off without showing any
|
---|
4895 | message window. The VM logfile will show information about
|
---|
4896 | what happened.
|
---|
4897 | </para>
|
---|
4898 | </listitem>
|
---|
4899 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4900 |
|
---|
4901 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4902 | <term>
|
---|
4903 | <literal>Ignore</literal>
|
---|
4904 | </term>
|
---|
4905 |
|
---|
4906 | <listitem>
|
---|
4907 | <para>
|
---|
4908 | The VM is left in stuck mode. Execution is stopped but no
|
---|
4909 | message window is shown. The VM has to be powered off
|
---|
4910 | manually.
|
---|
4911 | </para>
|
---|
4912 | </listitem>
|
---|
4913 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4914 |
|
---|
4915 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4916 |
|
---|
4917 | <para>
|
---|
4918 | This is a per-VM setting.
|
---|
4919 | </para>
|
---|
4920 |
|
---|
4921 | </sect2>
|
---|
4922 |
|
---|
4923 | <sect2 id="mouse-capture">
|
---|
4924 |
|
---|
4925 | <title>Configuring Automatic Mouse Capturing</title>
|
---|
4926 |
|
---|
4927 | <para>
|
---|
4928 | By default, the mouse is captured if the user clicks on the
|
---|
4929 | guest window and the guest expects relative mouse coordinates at
|
---|
4930 | this time. This happens if the pointing device is configured as
|
---|
4931 | PS/2 mouse and the guest has not yet started the &product-name;
|
---|
4932 | Guest Additions. For instance, the guest is booting or the Guest
|
---|
4933 | Additions are not installed, or if the pointing device is
|
---|
4934 | configured as a USB tablet but the guest has no USB driver
|
---|
4935 | loaded yet. Once the Guest Additions become active or the USB
|
---|
4936 | guest driver is started, the mouse capture is automatically
|
---|
4937 | released.
|
---|
4938 | </para>
|
---|
4939 |
|
---|
4940 | <para>
|
---|
4941 | The default behavior is sometimes not desired. Therefore it can
|
---|
4942 | be configured as follows:
|
---|
4943 | </para>
|
---|
4944 |
|
---|
4945 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/MouseCapturePolicy <replaceable>mode</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
4946 |
|
---|
4947 | <para>
|
---|
4948 | <replaceable>mode</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
4949 | </para>
|
---|
4950 |
|
---|
4951 | <variablelist>
|
---|
4952 |
|
---|
4953 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4954 | <term>
|
---|
4955 | <literal>Default</literal>
|
---|
4956 | </term>
|
---|
4957 |
|
---|
4958 | <listitem>
|
---|
4959 | <para>
|
---|
4960 | The default behavior as described above.
|
---|
4961 | </para>
|
---|
4962 | </listitem>
|
---|
4963 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4964 |
|
---|
4965 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4966 | <term>
|
---|
4967 | <literal>HostComboOnly</literal>
|
---|
4968 | </term>
|
---|
4969 |
|
---|
4970 | <listitem>
|
---|
4971 | <para>
|
---|
4972 | The mouse is only captured if the Host Key is toggled.
|
---|
4973 | </para>
|
---|
4974 | </listitem>
|
---|
4975 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4976 |
|
---|
4977 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
4978 | <term>
|
---|
4979 | <literal>Disabled</literal>
|
---|
4980 | </term>
|
---|
4981 |
|
---|
4982 | <listitem>
|
---|
4983 | <para>
|
---|
4984 | The mouse is never captured, also not by toggling the Host
|
---|
4985 | Key
|
---|
4986 | </para>
|
---|
4987 | </listitem>
|
---|
4988 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
4989 |
|
---|
4990 | </variablelist>
|
---|
4991 |
|
---|
4992 | <para>
|
---|
4993 | This is a per-VM setting.
|
---|
4994 | </para>
|
---|
4995 |
|
---|
4996 | </sect2>
|
---|
4997 |
|
---|
4998 | <sect2 id="legacy-fullscreen-mode">
|
---|
4999 |
|
---|
5000 | <title>Requesting Legacy Full-Screen Mode</title>
|
---|
5001 |
|
---|
5002 | <para>
|
---|
5003 | &product-name; uses special window manager facilities to switch
|
---|
5004 | a multi-screen machine to full-screen on a multi-monitor host
|
---|
5005 | system. However, not all window managers provide these
|
---|
5006 | facilities correctly. &product-name; can be configured to use a
|
---|
5007 | legacy method of switching to full-screen mode instead, by using
|
---|
5008 | the command:
|
---|
5009 | </para>
|
---|
5010 |
|
---|
5011 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/Fullscreen/LegacyMode true</screen>
|
---|
5012 |
|
---|
5013 | <para>
|
---|
5014 | You can go back to the default method by using the following
|
---|
5015 | command:
|
---|
5016 | </para>
|
---|
5017 |
|
---|
5018 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/Fullscreen/LegacyMode</screen>
|
---|
5019 |
|
---|
5020 | <para>
|
---|
5021 | This is a global setting.
|
---|
5022 | </para>
|
---|
5023 |
|
---|
5024 | </sect2>
|
---|
5025 |
|
---|
5026 | <sect2 id="restrict-network-attachments">
|
---|
5027 |
|
---|
5028 | <title>Removing Certain Modes of Networking From the GUI</title>
|
---|
5029 |
|
---|
5030 | <para>
|
---|
5031 | It is possible to remove networking modes from &product-name;
|
---|
5032 | GUI. To do this, use the following command:
|
---|
5033 | </para>
|
---|
5034 |
|
---|
5035 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/RestrictedNetworkAttachmentTypes <replaceable>property</replaceable>[,<replaceable>property</replaceable>...]</screen>
|
---|
5036 |
|
---|
5037 | <para>
|
---|
5038 | <replaceable>property</replaceable> is one of the following:
|
---|
5039 | </para>
|
---|
5040 |
|
---|
5041 | <variablelist>
|
---|
5042 |
|
---|
5043 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
5044 | <term>
|
---|
5045 | <literal>NAT</literal>
|
---|
5046 | </term>
|
---|
5047 |
|
---|
5048 | <listitem>
|
---|
5049 | <para>
|
---|
5050 | Remove the <emphasis role="bold">NAT</emphasis> option
|
---|
5051 | from the GUI.
|
---|
5052 | </para>
|
---|
5053 | </listitem>
|
---|
5054 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5055 |
|
---|
5056 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
5057 | <term>
|
---|
5058 | <literal>NATNetwork</literal>
|
---|
5059 | </term>
|
---|
5060 |
|
---|
5061 | <listitem>
|
---|
5062 | <para>
|
---|
5063 | Remove the <emphasis role="bold">NAT network</emphasis>
|
---|
5064 | option from the GUI.
|
---|
5065 | </para>
|
---|
5066 | </listitem>
|
---|
5067 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5068 |
|
---|
5069 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
5070 | <term>
|
---|
5071 | <literal>BridgedAdapter</literal>
|
---|
5072 | </term>
|
---|
5073 |
|
---|
5074 | <listitem>
|
---|
5075 | <para>
|
---|
5076 | Remove the <emphasis role="bold">Bridged
|
---|
5077 | networking</emphasis> option from the GUI.
|
---|
5078 | </para>
|
---|
5079 | </listitem>
|
---|
5080 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5081 |
|
---|
5082 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
5083 | <term>
|
---|
5084 | <literal>InternalNetwork</literal>
|
---|
5085 | </term>
|
---|
5086 |
|
---|
5087 | <listitem>
|
---|
5088 | <para>
|
---|
5089 | Remove the <emphasis role="bold">Internal
|
---|
5090 | networking</emphasis> option from the GUI.
|
---|
5091 | </para>
|
---|
5092 | </listitem>
|
---|
5093 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5094 |
|
---|
5095 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
5096 | <term>
|
---|
5097 | <literal>HostOnlyAdapter</literal>
|
---|
5098 | </term>
|
---|
5099 |
|
---|
5100 | <listitem>
|
---|
5101 | <para>
|
---|
5102 | Remove the <emphasis role="bold">Host Only
|
---|
5103 | networking</emphasis> option from the GUI.
|
---|
5104 | </para>
|
---|
5105 | </listitem>
|
---|
5106 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5107 |
|
---|
5108 | <varlistentry>
|
---|
5109 | <term>
|
---|
5110 | <literal>GenericDriver</literal>
|
---|
5111 | </term>
|
---|
5112 |
|
---|
5113 | <listitem>
|
---|
5114 | <para>
|
---|
5115 | Remove the <emphasis role="bold">Generic
|
---|
5116 | networking</emphasis> option from the GUI.
|
---|
5117 | </para>
|
---|
5118 | </listitem>
|
---|
5119 | </varlistentry>
|
---|
5120 |
|
---|
5121 | </variablelist>
|
---|
5122 |
|
---|
5123 | <para>
|
---|
5124 | This is a global setting. You can specify any combination of
|
---|
5125 | properties. To restore the default behavior, use the following
|
---|
5126 | command:
|
---|
5127 | </para>
|
---|
5128 |
|
---|
5129 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global GUI/RestrictedNetworkAttachmentTypes</screen>
|
---|
5130 |
|
---|
5131 | </sect2>
|
---|
5132 |
|
---|
5133 | </sect1>
|
---|
5134 |
|
---|
5135 | <sect1 id="vboxwebsrv-daemon">
|
---|
5136 |
|
---|
5137 | <title>Starting the &product-name; Web Service Automatically</title>
|
---|
5138 |
|
---|
5139 | <para>
|
---|
5140 | The &product-name; web service, <command>vboxwebsrv</command>, is
|
---|
5141 | used for controlling &product-name; remotely. It is documented in
|
---|
5142 | detail in the &product-name; Software Development Kit (SDK). See
|
---|
5143 | <xref linkend="VirtualBoxAPI" />. Web service start scripts are
|
---|
5144 | available for supported host operating systems. The following
|
---|
5145 | sections describe how to use the scripts. The &product-name; web
|
---|
5146 | service is never started automatically as a result of a standard
|
---|
5147 | installation.
|
---|
5148 | </para>
|
---|
5149 |
|
---|
5150 | <sect2 id="vboxwebsrv-linux">
|
---|
5151 |
|
---|
5152 | <title>Linux: Starting the Web Service With init</title>
|
---|
5153 |
|
---|
5154 | <para>
|
---|
5155 | On Linux, the web service can be automatically started during
|
---|
5156 | host boot by adding appropriate parameters to the file
|
---|
5157 | <filename>/etc/default/virtualbox</filename>. There is one
|
---|
5158 | mandatory parameter, <literal>VBOXWEB_USER</literal>, which must
|
---|
5159 | be set to the user which will later start the VMs. The
|
---|
5160 | parameters in the following table all start with the
|
---|
5161 | <literal>VBOXWEB_</literal> prefix string. For example:
|
---|
5162 | <literal>VBOXWEB_HOST</literal> and
|
---|
5163 | <literal>VBOXWEB_PORT</literal>.
|
---|
5164 | </para>
|
---|
5165 |
|
---|
5166 | <table id="table-websrv-config-params" tabstyle="oracle-all">
|
---|
5167 | <title>Web Service Configuration Parameters</title>
|
---|
5168 | <tgroup cols="3">
|
---|
5169 | <thead>
|
---|
5170 | <row>
|
---|
5171 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5172 | <emphasis role="bold">Parameter</emphasis>
|
---|
5173 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5174 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5175 | <emphasis role="bold">Description</emphasis>
|
---|
5176 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5177 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5178 | <emphasis role="bold">Default</emphasis>
|
---|
5179 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5180 | </row>
|
---|
5181 | </thead>
|
---|
5182 | <tbody>
|
---|
5183 | <row>
|
---|
5184 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5185 | <literal>USER</literal>
|
---|
5186 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5187 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5188 | The user which the web service runs as
|
---|
5189 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5190 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5191 | </row>
|
---|
5192 | <row>
|
---|
5193 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5194 | <literal>HOST</literal>
|
---|
5195 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5196 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5197 | The host to bind the web service to
|
---|
5198 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5199 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5200 | localhost
|
---|
5201 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5202 | </row>
|
---|
5203 | <row>
|
---|
5204 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5205 | <literal>PORT</literal>
|
---|
5206 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5207 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5208 | The port to bind the web service to
|
---|
5209 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5210 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5211 | 18083
|
---|
5212 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5213 | </row>
|
---|
5214 | <row>
|
---|
5215 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5216 | <literal>SSL_KEYFILE</literal>
|
---|
5217 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5218 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5219 | Server key and certificate file, in PEM format
|
---|
5220 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5221 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5222 | </row>
|
---|
5223 | <row>
|
---|
5224 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5225 | <literal>SSL_PASSWORDFILE</literal>
|
---|
5226 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5227 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5228 | File name for password to server key
|
---|
5229 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5230 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5231 | </row>
|
---|
5232 | <row>
|
---|
5233 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5234 | <literal>SSL_CACERT</literal>
|
---|
5235 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5236 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5237 | CA certificate file, in PEM format
|
---|
5238 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5239 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5240 | </row>
|
---|
5241 | <row>
|
---|
5242 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5243 | <literal>SSL_CAPATH</literal>
|
---|
5244 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5245 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5246 | CA certificate path
|
---|
5247 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5248 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5249 | </row>
|
---|
5250 | <row>
|
---|
5251 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5252 | <literal>SSL_DHFILE</literal>
|
---|
5253 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5254 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5255 | DH file name or DH key length in bits
|
---|
5256 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5257 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5258 | </row>
|
---|
5259 | <row>
|
---|
5260 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5261 | <literal>SSL_RANDFILE</literal>
|
---|
5262 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5263 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5264 | File containing seed for random number generator
|
---|
5265 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5266 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5267 | </row>
|
---|
5268 | <row>
|
---|
5269 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5270 | <literal>TIMEOUT</literal>
|
---|
5271 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5272 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5273 | Session timeout in seconds, 0 disables timeouts
|
---|
5274 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5275 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5276 | 300
|
---|
5277 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5278 | </row>
|
---|
5279 | <row>
|
---|
5280 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5281 | <literal>CHECK_INTERVAL</literal>
|
---|
5282 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5283 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5284 | Frequency of timeout checks in seconds
|
---|
5285 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5286 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5287 | 5
|
---|
5288 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5289 | </row>
|
---|
5290 | <row>
|
---|
5291 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5292 | <literal>THREADS</literal>
|
---|
5293 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5294 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5295 | Maximum number of worker threads to run in parallel
|
---|
5296 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5297 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5298 | 100
|
---|
5299 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5300 | </row>
|
---|
5301 | <row>
|
---|
5302 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5303 | <literal>KEEPALIVE</literal>
|
---|
5304 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5305 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5306 | Maximum number of requests before a socket will be
|
---|
5307 | closed
|
---|
5308 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5309 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5310 | 100
|
---|
5311 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5312 | </row>
|
---|
5313 | <row>
|
---|
5314 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5315 | <literal>ROTATE</literal>
|
---|
5316 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5317 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5318 | Number of log files, 0 disables log rotation
|
---|
5319 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5320 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5321 | 10
|
---|
5322 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5323 | </row>
|
---|
5324 | <row>
|
---|
5325 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5326 | <literal>LOGSIZE</literal>
|
---|
5327 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5328 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5329 | Maximum log file size to trigger rotation, in bytes
|
---|
5330 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5331 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5332 | 1MB
|
---|
5333 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5334 | </row>
|
---|
5335 | <row>
|
---|
5336 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5337 | <literal>LOGINTERVAL</literal>
|
---|
5338 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5339 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5340 | Maximum time interval to trigger log rotation, in
|
---|
5341 | seconds
|
---|
5342 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5343 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5344 | 1 day
|
---|
5345 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5346 | </row>
|
---|
5347 | </tbody>
|
---|
5348 | </tgroup>
|
---|
5349 | </table>
|
---|
5350 |
|
---|
5351 | <para>
|
---|
5352 | Setting the parameter <literal>SSL_KEYFILE</literal> enables the
|
---|
5353 | SSL/TLS support. Using encryption is strongly encouraged, as
|
---|
5354 | otherwise everything, including passwords, is transferred in
|
---|
5355 | clear text.
|
---|
5356 | </para>
|
---|
5357 |
|
---|
5358 | </sect2>
|
---|
5359 |
|
---|
5360 | <sect2 id="vboxwebsrv-solaris">
|
---|
5361 |
|
---|
5362 | <title>Oracle Solaris: Starting the Web Service With SMF</title>
|
---|
5363 |
|
---|
5364 | <para>
|
---|
5365 | On Oracle Solaris hosts, the &product-name; web service daemon
|
---|
5366 | is integrated into the SMF framework. You can change the
|
---|
5367 | parameters, but do not have to if the defaults below already
|
---|
5368 | match your needs:
|
---|
5369 | </para>
|
---|
5370 |
|
---|
5371 | <screen>svccfg -s svc:/application/virtualbox/webservice:default setprop config/host=localhost
|
---|
5372 | svccfg -s svc:/application/virtualbox/webservice:default setprop config/port=18083
|
---|
5373 | svccfg -s svc:/application/virtualbox/webservice:default setprop config/user=root</screen>
|
---|
5374 |
|
---|
5375 | <para>
|
---|
5376 | The table in <xref linkend="vboxwebsrv-linux"/> showing the
|
---|
5377 | parameter names and defaults also applies for Oracle Solaris.
|
---|
5378 | The parameter names must be changed to lowercase and a prefix of
|
---|
5379 | <literal>config/</literal> has to be added. For example:
|
---|
5380 | <literal>config/user</literal> or
|
---|
5381 | <literal>config/ssl_keyfile</literal>. If you make any change,
|
---|
5382 | do not forget to run the following command to put the changes
|
---|
5383 | into effect immediately:
|
---|
5384 | </para>
|
---|
5385 |
|
---|
5386 | <screen>svcadm refresh svc:/application/virtualbox/webservice:default</screen>
|
---|
5387 |
|
---|
5388 | <para>
|
---|
5389 | If you forget the above command then the previous settings are
|
---|
5390 | used when enabling the service. Check the current property
|
---|
5391 | settings as follows:
|
---|
5392 | </para>
|
---|
5393 |
|
---|
5394 | <screen>svcprop -p config svc:/application/virtualbox/webservice:default</screen>
|
---|
5395 |
|
---|
5396 | <para>
|
---|
5397 | When everything is configured correctly you can start the
|
---|
5398 | &product-name; web service with the following command:
|
---|
5399 | </para>
|
---|
5400 |
|
---|
5401 | <screen>svcadm enable svc:/application/virtualbox/webservice:default</screen>
|
---|
5402 |
|
---|
5403 | <para>
|
---|
5404 | For more information about SMF, please refer to the Oracle
|
---|
5405 | Solaris documentation.
|
---|
5406 | </para>
|
---|
5407 |
|
---|
5408 | </sect2>
|
---|
5409 |
|
---|
5410 | <sect2 id="vboxwebsrv-osx">
|
---|
5411 |
|
---|
5412 | <title>Mac OS X: Starting the Web Service With launchd</title>
|
---|
5413 |
|
---|
5414 | <para>
|
---|
5415 | On Mac OS X, launchd is used to start the &product-name;
|
---|
5416 | webservice. An example configuration file can be found in
|
---|
5417 | <filename>$HOME/Library/LaunchAgents/org.virtualbox.vboxwebsrv.plist</filename>.
|
---|
5418 | It can be enabled by changing the <literal>Disabled</literal>
|
---|
5419 | key from <literal>true</literal> to <literal>false</literal>. To
|
---|
5420 | manually start the service use the following command:
|
---|
5421 | </para>
|
---|
5422 |
|
---|
5423 | <screen>launchctl load ~/Library/LaunchAgents/org.virtualbox.vboxwebsrv.plist</screen>
|
---|
5424 |
|
---|
5425 | <para>
|
---|
5426 | For additional information on how launchd services could be
|
---|
5427 | configured see:
|
---|
5428 | </para>
|
---|
5429 |
|
---|
5430 | <para>
|
---|
5431 | <ulink
|
---|
5432 | url="https://developer.apple.com/library/mac/documentation/MacOSX/Conceptual/BPSystemStartup/Chapters/CreatingLaunchdJobs.html" />.
|
---|
5433 | </para>
|
---|
5434 |
|
---|
5435 | </sect2>
|
---|
5436 |
|
---|
5437 | </sect1>
|
---|
5438 |
|
---|
5439 | <sect1 id="vboxwatchdog">
|
---|
5440 |
|
---|
5441 | <title>&product-name; Watchdog</title>
|
---|
5442 |
|
---|
5443 | <para>
|
---|
5444 | The memory ballooning service, formerly known as
|
---|
5445 | <command>VBoxBalloonCtrl</command>, was renamed to VBoxWatchdog.
|
---|
5446 | This service now incorporates the following host services that are
|
---|
5447 | meant to be run in a server environment:
|
---|
5448 | </para>
|
---|
5449 |
|
---|
5450 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
5451 |
|
---|
5452 | <listitem>
|
---|
5453 | <para>
|
---|
5454 | <emphasis role="bold">Memory ballooning control.</emphasis>
|
---|
5455 | This service automatically takes care of a VM's configured
|
---|
5456 | memory balloon. See <xref linkend="guestadd-balloon" />. This
|
---|
5457 | service is useful for server environments where VMs may
|
---|
5458 | dynamically require more or less memory during runtime.
|
---|
5459 | </para>
|
---|
5460 |
|
---|
5461 | <para>
|
---|
5462 | The service periodically checks a VM's current memory balloon
|
---|
5463 | and its free guest RAM and automatically adjusts the current
|
---|
5464 | memory balloon by inflating or deflating it accordingly. This
|
---|
5465 | handling only applies to running VMs having recent Guest
|
---|
5466 | Additions installed.
|
---|
5467 | </para>
|
---|
5468 | </listitem>
|
---|
5469 |
|
---|
5470 | <listitem>
|
---|
5471 | <para>
|
---|
5472 | <emphasis role="bold">Host isolation detection.</emphasis>
|
---|
5473 | This service provides a way to detect whether the host cannot
|
---|
5474 | reach the specific &product-name; server instance anymore and
|
---|
5475 | take appropriate actions, such as shutting down, saving the
|
---|
5476 | current state or even powering down certain VMs.
|
---|
5477 | </para>
|
---|
5478 | </listitem>
|
---|
5479 |
|
---|
5480 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
5481 |
|
---|
5482 | <para>
|
---|
5483 | All configuration values can be either specified using the command
|
---|
5484 | line or global extradata, whereas command line values always have
|
---|
5485 | a higher priority when set. Some of the configuration values also
|
---|
5486 | be specified on a per-VM basis. So the overall lookup order is:
|
---|
5487 | command line, per-VM basis extradata if available, global
|
---|
5488 | extradata.
|
---|
5489 | </para>
|
---|
5490 |
|
---|
5491 | <sect2 id="vboxwatchdog-ballonctrl">
|
---|
5492 |
|
---|
5493 | <title>Memory Ballooning Control</title>
|
---|
5494 |
|
---|
5495 | <para>
|
---|
5496 | The memory ballooning control inflates and deflates the memory
|
---|
5497 | balloon of VMs based on the VMs free memory and the desired
|
---|
5498 | maximum balloon size.
|
---|
5499 | </para>
|
---|
5500 |
|
---|
5501 | <para>
|
---|
5502 | To set up the memory ballooning control the maximum ballooning
|
---|
5503 | size a VM can reach needs to be set. This can be specified using
|
---|
5504 | the command line, as follows:
|
---|
5505 | </para>
|
---|
5506 |
|
---|
5507 | <screen>--balloon-max <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5508 |
|
---|
5509 | <para>
|
---|
5510 | Using a per-VM basis extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5511 | </para>
|
---|
5512 |
|
---|
5513 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <VM-Name> VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/BalloonCtrl/BalloonSizeMax <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5514 |
|
---|
5515 | <para>
|
---|
5516 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5517 | </para>
|
---|
5518 |
|
---|
5519 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/BalloonCtrl/BalloonSizeMax <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5520 |
|
---|
5521 | <note>
|
---|
5522 | <para>
|
---|
5523 | If no maximum ballooning size is specified by at least one of
|
---|
5524 | the parameters above, no ballooning will be performed at all.
|
---|
5525 | </para>
|
---|
5526 | </note>
|
---|
5527 |
|
---|
5528 | <para>
|
---|
5529 | Setting the ballooning increment in MB can be either done using
|
---|
5530 | command line, as follows:
|
---|
5531 | </para>
|
---|
5532 |
|
---|
5533 | <screen>--balloon-inc <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5534 |
|
---|
5535 | <para>
|
---|
5536 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5537 | </para>
|
---|
5538 |
|
---|
5539 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/BalloonCtrl/BalloonIncrementMB <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5540 |
|
---|
5541 | <para>
|
---|
5542 | The default ballooning increment is 256 MB if not specified.
|
---|
5543 | </para>
|
---|
5544 |
|
---|
5545 | <para>
|
---|
5546 | The same options apply for a ballooning decrement. Using the
|
---|
5547 | command line, as follows:
|
---|
5548 | </para>
|
---|
5549 |
|
---|
5550 | <screen>--balloon-dec <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5551 |
|
---|
5552 | <para>
|
---|
5553 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5554 | </para>
|
---|
5555 |
|
---|
5556 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/BalloonCtrl/BalloonDecrementMB <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5557 |
|
---|
5558 | <para>
|
---|
5559 | The default ballooning decrement is 128 MB if not specified.
|
---|
5560 | </para>
|
---|
5561 |
|
---|
5562 | <para>
|
---|
5563 | The lower limit in MB for a balloon can be defined using the
|
---|
5564 | command line, as follows:
|
---|
5565 | </para>
|
---|
5566 |
|
---|
5567 | <screen>--balloon-lower-limit <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5568 |
|
---|
5569 | <para>
|
---|
5570 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5571 | </para>
|
---|
5572 |
|
---|
5573 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/BalloonCtrl/BalloonLowerLimitMB <Size in MB></screen>
|
---|
5574 |
|
---|
5575 | <para>
|
---|
5576 | The default lower limit is 128 MB if not specified.
|
---|
5577 | </para>
|
---|
5578 |
|
---|
5579 | </sect2>
|
---|
5580 |
|
---|
5581 | <sect2 id="vboxwatchdog-hostisln">
|
---|
5582 |
|
---|
5583 | <title>Host Isolation Detection</title>
|
---|
5584 |
|
---|
5585 | <para>
|
---|
5586 | To detect whether a host is being isolated, that is, the host
|
---|
5587 | cannot reach the &product-name; server instance anymore, the
|
---|
5588 | host needs to set an alternating value to a global extradata
|
---|
5589 | value within a time period. If this value is not set within that
|
---|
5590 | time period a timeout occurred and the so-called host isolation
|
---|
5591 | response will be performed to the VMs handled. Which VMs are
|
---|
5592 | handled can be controlled by defining VM groups and assigning
|
---|
5593 | VMs to those groups. By default no groups are set, meaning that
|
---|
5594 | all VMs on the server will be handled when no host response is
|
---|
5595 | received within 30 seconds.
|
---|
5596 | </para>
|
---|
5597 |
|
---|
5598 | <para>
|
---|
5599 | Set the groups handled by the host isolation detection using the
|
---|
5600 | following command line:
|
---|
5601 | </para>
|
---|
5602 |
|
---|
5603 | <screen>--apimon-groups=<string[,stringN]></screen>
|
---|
5604 |
|
---|
5605 | <para>
|
---|
5606 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5607 | </para>
|
---|
5608 |
|
---|
5609 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/APIMonitor/Groups <string[,stringN]></screen>
|
---|
5610 |
|
---|
5611 | <para>
|
---|
5612 | Set the host isolation timeout using the following command line:
|
---|
5613 | </para>
|
---|
5614 |
|
---|
5615 | <screen>--apimon-isln-timeout=<ms></screen>
|
---|
5616 |
|
---|
5617 | <para>
|
---|
5618 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5619 | </para>
|
---|
5620 |
|
---|
5621 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/APIMonitor/IsolationTimeoutMS <ms></screen>
|
---|
5622 |
|
---|
5623 | <para>
|
---|
5624 | Set the actual host isolation response using the following
|
---|
5625 | command line:
|
---|
5626 | </para>
|
---|
5627 |
|
---|
5628 | <screen>--apimon-isln-response=<cmd></screen>
|
---|
5629 |
|
---|
5630 | <para>
|
---|
5631 | Using a global extradata value, as follows:
|
---|
5632 | </para>
|
---|
5633 |
|
---|
5634 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata global VBoxInternal2/Watchdog/APIMonitor/IsolationResponse <cmd></screen>
|
---|
5635 |
|
---|
5636 | <para>
|
---|
5637 | The following response commands are available:
|
---|
5638 | </para>
|
---|
5639 |
|
---|
5640 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
5641 |
|
---|
5642 | <listitem>
|
---|
5643 | <para>
|
---|
5644 | <literal>none</literal>. This has no effect.
|
---|
5645 | </para>
|
---|
5646 | </listitem>
|
---|
5647 |
|
---|
5648 | <listitem>
|
---|
5649 | <para>
|
---|
5650 | <literal>pause</literal>. Pauses the execution of a VM.
|
---|
5651 | </para>
|
---|
5652 | </listitem>
|
---|
5653 |
|
---|
5654 | <listitem>
|
---|
5655 | <para>
|
---|
5656 | <literal>poweroff</literal>. Shuts down the VM by pressing
|
---|
5657 | the virtual power button. The VM will not have the chance of
|
---|
5658 | saving any data or veto the shutdown process.
|
---|
5659 | </para>
|
---|
5660 | </listitem>
|
---|
5661 |
|
---|
5662 | <listitem>
|
---|
5663 | <para>
|
---|
5664 | <literal>save</literal>. Saves the current machine state and
|
---|
5665 | powers off the VM afterwards. If saving the machine state
|
---|
5666 | fails the VM will be paused.
|
---|
5667 | </para>
|
---|
5668 | </listitem>
|
---|
5669 |
|
---|
5670 | <listitem>
|
---|
5671 | <para>
|
---|
5672 | <literal>shutdown</literal>. Shuts down the VM in a gentle
|
---|
5673 | way by sending an <literal>ACPI</literal> shutdown event to
|
---|
5674 | the VM's operating system. The OS then has the chance of
|
---|
5675 | doing a clean shutdown.
|
---|
5676 | </para>
|
---|
5677 | </listitem>
|
---|
5678 |
|
---|
5679 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
5680 |
|
---|
5681 | </sect2>
|
---|
5682 |
|
---|
5683 | <sect2 id="vboxwatchdog-moreinfo">
|
---|
5684 |
|
---|
5685 | <title>More Information</title>
|
---|
5686 |
|
---|
5687 | <para>
|
---|
5688 | For more advanced options and parameters like verbose logging
|
---|
5689 | check the built-in command line help accessible with
|
---|
5690 | <option>--help</option>.
|
---|
5691 | </para>
|
---|
5692 |
|
---|
5693 | </sect2>
|
---|
5694 |
|
---|
5695 | <sect2 id="vboxwatchdog-linux">
|
---|
5696 |
|
---|
5697 | <title>Linux: Starting the Watchdog Service With init</title>
|
---|
5698 |
|
---|
5699 | <para>
|
---|
5700 | On Linux, the watchdog service can be automatically started
|
---|
5701 | during host boot by adding appropriate parameters to the file
|
---|
5702 | <filename>/etc/default/virtualbox</filename>. There is one
|
---|
5703 | mandatory parameter, <literal>VBOXWATCHDOG_USER</literal>, which
|
---|
5704 | must be set to the user which will later start the VMs. For
|
---|
5705 | backward compatibility you can also specify
|
---|
5706 | <literal>VBOXBALLOONCTRL_USER</literal>.
|
---|
5707 | </para>
|
---|
5708 |
|
---|
5709 | <para>
|
---|
5710 | The parameters in the following table all start with the
|
---|
5711 | <literal>VBOXWATCHDOG_</literal> prefix string. For example:
|
---|
5712 | <literal>VBOXWATCHDOG_BALLOON_INTERVAL</literal> and
|
---|
5713 | <literal>VBOXWATCHDOG_LOGSIZE</literal>. Legacy parameters such
|
---|
5714 | as <literal>VBOXBALLOONCTRL_INTERVAL</literal> can still be
|
---|
5715 | used.
|
---|
5716 | </para>
|
---|
5717 |
|
---|
5718 | <table id="table-vboxwatchdog-config-params" tabstyle="oracle-all">
|
---|
5719 | <title>&product-name; Watchdog Configuration Parameters</title>
|
---|
5720 | <tgroup cols="3">
|
---|
5721 | <thead>
|
---|
5722 | <row>
|
---|
5723 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5724 | <emphasis role="bold">Parameter</emphasis>
|
---|
5725 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5726 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5727 | <emphasis role="bold">Description</emphasis>
|
---|
5728 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5729 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5730 | <emphasis role="bold">Default</emphasis>
|
---|
5731 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5732 | </row>
|
---|
5733 | </thead>
|
---|
5734 | <tbody>
|
---|
5735 | <row>
|
---|
5736 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5737 | <literal>USER</literal>
|
---|
5738 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5739 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5740 | The user which the watchdog service runs as
|
---|
5741 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5742 | <entry><para></para></entry>
|
---|
5743 | </row>
|
---|
5744 | <row>
|
---|
5745 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5746 | <literal>ROTATE</literal>
|
---|
5747 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5748 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5749 | Number of log files, 0 disables log rotation
|
---|
5750 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5751 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5752 | 10
|
---|
5753 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5754 | </row>
|
---|
5755 | <row>
|
---|
5756 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5757 | <literal>LOGSIZE</literal>
|
---|
5758 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5759 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5760 | Maximum log file size to trigger rotation, in bytes
|
---|
5761 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5762 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5763 | 1MB
|
---|
5764 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5765 | </row>
|
---|
5766 | <row>
|
---|
5767 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5768 | <literal>LOGINTERVAL</literal>
|
---|
5769 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5770 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5771 | Maximum time interval to trigger log rotation, in
|
---|
5772 | seconds
|
---|
5773 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5774 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5775 | 1 day
|
---|
5776 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5777 | </row>
|
---|
5778 | <row>
|
---|
5779 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5780 | <literal>BALLOON_INTERVAL</literal>
|
---|
5781 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5782 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5783 | Interval for checking the balloon size, in
|
---|
5784 | milliseconds
|
---|
5785 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5786 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5787 | 30000
|
---|
5788 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5789 | </row>
|
---|
5790 | <row>
|
---|
5791 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5792 | <literal>BALLOON_INCREMENT</literal>
|
---|
5793 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5794 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5795 | Balloon size increment, in megabytes
|
---|
5796 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5797 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5798 | 256
|
---|
5799 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5800 | </row>
|
---|
5801 | <row>
|
---|
5802 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5803 | <literal>BALLOON_DECREMENT</literal>
|
---|
5804 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5805 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5806 | Balloon size decrement, in megabytes
|
---|
5807 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5808 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5809 | 128
|
---|
5810 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5811 | </row>
|
---|
5812 | <row>
|
---|
5813 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5814 | <literal>BALLOON_LOWERLIMIT</literal>
|
---|
5815 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5816 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5817 | Balloon size lower limit, in megabytes
|
---|
5818 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5819 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5820 | 64
|
---|
5821 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5822 | </row>
|
---|
5823 | <row>
|
---|
5824 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5825 | <literal>BALLOON_SAFETYMARGIN</literal>
|
---|
5826 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5827 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5828 | Free memory required for decreasing the balloon size,
|
---|
5829 | in megabytes
|
---|
5830 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5831 | <entry><para>
|
---|
5832 | 1024
|
---|
5833 | </para></entry>
|
---|
5834 | </row>
|
---|
5835 | </tbody>
|
---|
5836 | </tgroup>
|
---|
5837 | </table>
|
---|
5838 |
|
---|
5839 | </sect2>
|
---|
5840 |
|
---|
5841 | <sect2 id="vboxwatchdog-solaris">
|
---|
5842 |
|
---|
5843 | <title>Oracle Solaris: Starting the Watchdog Service With SMF</title>
|
---|
5844 |
|
---|
5845 | <para>
|
---|
5846 | On Oracle Solaris hosts, the &product-name; watchdog service
|
---|
5847 | daemon is integrated into the SMF framework. You can change the
|
---|
5848 | parameters, but do not have to if the defaults already match
|
---|
5849 | your needs:
|
---|
5850 | </para>
|
---|
5851 |
|
---|
5852 | <screen>svccfg -s svc:/application/virtualbox/balloonctrl:default setprop \
|
---|
5853 | config/balloon_interval=10000
|
---|
5854 | svccfg -s svc:/application/virtualbox/balloonctrl:default setprop \
|
---|
5855 | config/balloon_safetymargin=134217728</screen>
|
---|
5856 |
|
---|
5857 | <para>
|
---|
5858 | <xref linkend="table-vboxwatchdog-config-params"/> also applies
|
---|
5859 | for Oracle Solaris. The parameter names must be changed to
|
---|
5860 | lowercase and a prefix of <literal>config/</literal> has to be
|
---|
5861 | added. For example: <literal>config/user</literal> or
|
---|
5862 | <literal>config/balloon_safetymargin</literal>. If you made any
|
---|
5863 | change, do not forget to run the following command to put the
|
---|
5864 | changes into effect immediately:
|
---|
5865 | </para>
|
---|
5866 |
|
---|
5867 | <screen>svcadm refresh svc:/application/virtualbox/balloonctrl:default</screen>
|
---|
5868 |
|
---|
5869 | <para>
|
---|
5870 | If you forget the above command then the previous settings will
|
---|
5871 | be used when enabling the service. Check the current property
|
---|
5872 | settings with the following command:
|
---|
5873 | </para>
|
---|
5874 |
|
---|
5875 | <screen>svcprop -p config svc:/application/virtualbox/balloonctrl:default</screen>
|
---|
5876 |
|
---|
5877 | <para>
|
---|
5878 | When everything is configured correctly you can start the
|
---|
5879 | &product-name; watchdog service with the following command:
|
---|
5880 | </para>
|
---|
5881 |
|
---|
5882 | <screen>svcadm enable svc:/application/virtualbox/balloonctrl:default</screen>
|
---|
5883 |
|
---|
5884 | <para>
|
---|
5885 | For more information about SMF, please refer to the Oracle
|
---|
5886 | Solaris documentation.
|
---|
5887 | </para>
|
---|
5888 |
|
---|
5889 | </sect2>
|
---|
5890 |
|
---|
5891 | </sect1>
|
---|
5892 |
|
---|
5893 | <sect1 id="otherextpacks">
|
---|
5894 |
|
---|
5895 | <title>Other Extension Packs</title>
|
---|
5896 |
|
---|
5897 | <para>
|
---|
5898 | Another extension pack called VNC is available. This extension
|
---|
5899 | pack is open source and replaces the previous integration of the
|
---|
5900 | VNC remote access protocol. This is experimental code, and is
|
---|
5901 | initially available in the &product-name; source code package
|
---|
5902 | only. It is to a large portion code contributed by users, and is
|
---|
5903 | not supported in any way by Oracle.
|
---|
5904 | </para>
|
---|
5905 |
|
---|
5906 | <para>
|
---|
5907 | The keyboard handling is severely limited, and only the US
|
---|
5908 | keyboard layout works. Other keyboard layouts will have at least
|
---|
5909 | some keys which produce the wrong results, often with quite
|
---|
5910 | surprising effects, and for layouts which have significant
|
---|
5911 | differences to the US keyboard layout it is most likely unusable.
|
---|
5912 | </para>
|
---|
5913 |
|
---|
5914 | <para>
|
---|
5915 | It is possible to install both the &product-name; Extension Pack
|
---|
5916 | and VNC, but only one VRDE module can be active at any time. The
|
---|
5917 | following command switches to the VNC VRDE module in VNC:
|
---|
5918 | </para>
|
---|
5919 |
|
---|
5920 | <screen>VBoxManage setproperty vrdeextpack VNC</screen>
|
---|
5921 |
|
---|
5922 | <para>
|
---|
5923 | Configuring the remote access works very similarly to VRDP, see
|
---|
5924 | <xref linkend="vrde" />, with some limitations. VNC does not
|
---|
5925 | support specifying several port numbers, and the authentication is
|
---|
5926 | done differently. VNC can only deal with password authentication,
|
---|
5927 | and there is no option to use password hashes. This leaves no
|
---|
5928 | other choice than having a clear-text password in the VM
|
---|
5929 | configuration, which can be set with the following command:
|
---|
5930 | </para>
|
---|
5931 |
|
---|
5932 | <screen>VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --vrdeproperty VNCPassword=secret</screen>
|
---|
5933 |
|
---|
5934 | <para>
|
---|
5935 | The user is responsible for keeping this password secret, and it
|
---|
5936 | should be removed when a VM configuration is passed to another
|
---|
5937 | person, for whatever purpose. Some VNC servers claim to have
|
---|
5938 | encrypted passwords in the configuration. This is not true
|
---|
5939 | encryption, it is only concealing the passwords, which is only as
|
---|
5940 | secure as using clear-text passwords.
|
---|
5941 | </para>
|
---|
5942 |
|
---|
5943 | <para>
|
---|
5944 | The following command switches back to VRDP, if installed:
|
---|
5945 | </para>
|
---|
5946 |
|
---|
5947 | <screen>VBoxManage setproperty vrdeextpack "&product-name; Extension Pack"</screen>
|
---|
5948 |
|
---|
5949 | </sect1>
|
---|
5950 |
|
---|
5951 | <sect1 id="autostart">
|
---|
5952 |
|
---|
5953 | <title>Starting Virtual Machines During System Boot</title>
|
---|
5954 |
|
---|
5955 | <para>
|
---|
5956 | You can start VMs automatically during system boot on Linux,
|
---|
5957 | Oracle Solaris, and Mac OS X platforms for all users.
|
---|
5958 | </para>
|
---|
5959 |
|
---|
5960 | <sect2 id="autostart-linux">
|
---|
5961 |
|
---|
5962 | <title>Linux: Starting the Autostart Service With init</title>
|
---|
5963 |
|
---|
5964 | <para>
|
---|
5965 | On Linux, the autostart service is activated by setting two
|
---|
5966 | variables in <filename>/etc/default/virtualbox</filename>. The
|
---|
5967 | first one is <literal>VBOXAUTOSTART_DB</literal> which contains
|
---|
5968 | an absolute path to the autostart database directory. The
|
---|
5969 | directory should have write access for every user who should be
|
---|
5970 | able to start virtual machines automatically. Furthermore the
|
---|
5971 | directory should have the sticky bit set. The second variable is
|
---|
5972 | <literal>VBOXAUTOSTART_CONFIG</literal> which points the service
|
---|
5973 | to the autostart configuration file which is used during boot to
|
---|
5974 | determine whether to allow individual users to start a VM
|
---|
5975 | automatically and configure startup delays. The configuration
|
---|
5976 | file can be placed in <filename>/etc/vbox</filename> and
|
---|
5977 | contains several options. One is
|
---|
5978 | <literal>default_policy</literal> which controls whether the
|
---|
5979 | autostart service allows or denies to start a VM for users which
|
---|
5980 | are not in the exception list. The exception list starts with
|
---|
5981 | <literal>exception_list</literal> and contains a comma separated
|
---|
5982 | list with usernames. Furthermore a separate startup delay can be
|
---|
5983 | configured for every user to avoid overloading the host. A
|
---|
5984 | sample configuration is given below:
|
---|
5985 | </para>
|
---|
5986 |
|
---|
5987 | <screen>
|
---|
5988 | # Default policy is to deny starting a VM, the other option is "allow".
|
---|
5989 | default_policy = deny
|
---|
5990 |
|
---|
5991 | # Bob is allowed to start virtual machines but starting them
|
---|
5992 | # will be delayed for 10 seconds
|
---|
5993 | bob = {
|
---|
5994 | allow = true
|
---|
5995 | startup_delay = 10
|
---|
5996 | }
|
---|
5997 |
|
---|
5998 | # Alice is not allowed to start virtual machines, useful to exclude certain users
|
---|
5999 | # if the default policy is set to allow.
|
---|
6000 | alice = {
|
---|
6001 | allow = false
|
---|
6002 | }
|
---|
6003 | </screen>
|
---|
6004 |
|
---|
6005 | <para>
|
---|
6006 | Any user who wants to enable autostart for individual machines
|
---|
6007 | must set the path to the autostart database directory with the
|
---|
6008 | following command:
|
---|
6009 | </para>
|
---|
6010 |
|
---|
6011 | <screen>VBoxManage setproperty autostartdbpath <replaceable>autostart-directory</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6012 |
|
---|
6013 | </sect2>
|
---|
6014 |
|
---|
6015 | <sect2 id="autostart-solaris">
|
---|
6016 |
|
---|
6017 | <title>Oracle Solaris: Starting the Autostart Service With SMF</title>
|
---|
6018 |
|
---|
6019 | <para>
|
---|
6020 | On Oracle Solaris hosts, the &product-name; autostart daemon is
|
---|
6021 | integrated into the SMF framework. To enable it you must point
|
---|
6022 | the service to an existing configuration file which has the same
|
---|
6023 | format as on Linux, see <xref linkend="autostart-linux" />. For
|
---|
6024 | example:
|
---|
6025 | </para>
|
---|
6026 |
|
---|
6027 | <screen># svccfg -s svc:/application/virtualbox/autostart:default setprop \
|
---|
6028 | config/config=/etc/vbox/autostart.cfg</screen>
|
---|
6029 |
|
---|
6030 | <para>
|
---|
6031 | When everything is configured correctly you can start the
|
---|
6032 | &product-name; autostart service with the following command:
|
---|
6033 | </para>
|
---|
6034 |
|
---|
6035 | <screen># svcadm enable svc:/application/virtualbox/autostart:default</screen>
|
---|
6036 |
|
---|
6037 | <para>
|
---|
6038 | For more information about SMF, see the Oracle Solaris
|
---|
6039 | documentation.
|
---|
6040 | </para>
|
---|
6041 |
|
---|
6042 | </sect2>
|
---|
6043 |
|
---|
6044 | <sect2 id="autostart-osx">
|
---|
6045 |
|
---|
6046 | <title>Mac OS X: Starting the Autostart Service With launchd</title>
|
---|
6047 |
|
---|
6048 | <para>
|
---|
6049 | On Mac OS X, launchd is used to start the &product-name;
|
---|
6050 | autostart service. An example configuration file can be found in
|
---|
6051 | <filename>/Applications/VirtualBox.app/Contents/MacOS/org.virtualbox.vboxautostart.plist</filename>.
|
---|
6052 | To enable the service copy the file to
|
---|
6053 | <filename>/Library/LaunchDaemons</filename> and change the
|
---|
6054 | <literal>Disabled</literal> key from <literal>true</literal> to
|
---|
6055 | <literal>false</literal>. Furthermore replace the second
|
---|
6056 | parameter to an existing configuration file which has the same
|
---|
6057 | format as on Linux, see <xref linkend="autostart-linux" />.
|
---|
6058 | </para>
|
---|
6059 |
|
---|
6060 | <para>
|
---|
6061 | To manually start the service use the following command:
|
---|
6062 | </para>
|
---|
6063 |
|
---|
6064 | <screen># launchctl load /Library/LaunchDaemons/org.virtualbox.vboxautostart.plist</screen>
|
---|
6065 |
|
---|
6066 | <para>
|
---|
6067 | For additional information on how launchd services can be
|
---|
6068 | configured see:
|
---|
6069 | </para>
|
---|
6070 |
|
---|
6071 | <para>
|
---|
6072 | <ulink
|
---|
6073 | url="http://developer.apple.com/mac/library/documentation/MacOSX/Conceptual/BPSystemStartup/BPSystemStartup.html" />.
|
---|
6074 | </para>
|
---|
6075 |
|
---|
6076 | </sect2>
|
---|
6077 |
|
---|
6078 | <sect2 id="autostart-windows">
|
---|
6079 |
|
---|
6080 | <title>Windows: Starting the Autostart Service</title>
|
---|
6081 |
|
---|
6082 | <para>
|
---|
6083 | On Windows, autostart functionality consist of two components.
|
---|
6084 | First one is configuration file where the administrator can both
|
---|
6085 | set delayed start of the VMs and temporary disable autostarting
|
---|
6086 | for the particular user. The configuration file should be located
|
---|
6087 | in the folder accessible by all required users but it should have
|
---|
6088 | permissions allowing the only reading by everyone but
|
---|
6089 | administrators. The configuration file contains several options.
|
---|
6090 | One is <literal>default_policy</literal> which controls whether the
|
---|
6091 | autostart service allows or denies to start a VM for users which
|
---|
6092 | are not in the exception list. The exception list starts with
|
---|
6093 | <literal>exception_list</literal> and contains a comma separated
|
---|
6094 | list with usernames. Furthermore a separate startup delay can be
|
---|
6095 | configured for every user to avoid overloading the host. A
|
---|
6096 | sample configuration is given below:
|
---|
6097 | </para>
|
---|
6098 |
|
---|
6099 | <screen>
|
---|
6100 | # Default policy is to deny starting a VM, the other option is "allow".
|
---|
6101 | default_policy = deny
|
---|
6102 |
|
---|
6103 | # Bob is allowed to start virtual machines but starting them
|
---|
6104 | # will be delayed for 10 seconds
|
---|
6105 | bob = {
|
---|
6106 | allow = true
|
---|
6107 | startup_delay = 10
|
---|
6108 | }
|
---|
6109 |
|
---|
6110 | # Alice is not allowed to start virtual machines, useful to exclude certain users
|
---|
6111 | # if the default policy is set to allow.
|
---|
6112 | alice = {
|
---|
6113 | allow = false
|
---|
6114 | }
|
---|
6115 | </screen>
|
---|
6116 |
|
---|
6117 | <para>
|
---|
6118 | The user name can be specified using the following forms: "user",
|
---|
6119 | "domain\user", ".\user" and "user@domain". Administrator must add
|
---|
6120 | the <literal>VBOXAUTOSTART_CONFIG</literal> environment variable into
|
---|
6121 | system variables containing the path to the configuration file
|
---|
6122 | described above. The environment variable tells the autostart services
|
---|
6123 | what configuration file is used.
|
---|
6124 | </para>
|
---|
6125 |
|
---|
6126 | <para>
|
---|
6127 | Second component of autostart functionality is Windows service, every
|
---|
6128 | instance of it works on behalf of particular user using its own
|
---|
6129 | credentials.
|
---|
6130 | </para>
|
---|
6131 |
|
---|
6132 | <para>
|
---|
6133 | To enable autostarting for a particular user, a member of the
|
---|
6134 | administrators group must run the following command:
|
---|
6135 | </para>
|
---|
6136 |
|
---|
6137 | <screen>VBoxAutostartSvc install --user=<replaceable>user</replaceable> [--password-file=<replaceable>password_file</replaceable>]</screen>
|
---|
6138 |
|
---|
6139 | <para>
|
---|
6140 | The password file should contain the password followed by a line
|
---|
6141 | break. The rest of the file is ignored. The user will be asked
|
---|
6142 | for a password if the password file is not specified.
|
---|
6143 | </para>
|
---|
6144 |
|
---|
6145 | <para>
|
---|
6146 | To disable autostarting for particular user, a member of the
|
---|
6147 | administrators group must run the following command:
|
---|
6148 | </para>
|
---|
6149 |
|
---|
6150 | <screen>VBoxAutostartSvc delete --user=<replaceable>user</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6151 |
|
---|
6152 | <para>
|
---|
6153 | If a user has changed their password then a member of the
|
---|
6154 | administrators group must either reinstall the service or change
|
---|
6155 | the service credentials using Windows Service Manager. Due to
|
---|
6156 | Windows security policies, the autostart service cannot be
|
---|
6157 | installed for users with empty passwords.
|
---|
6158 | </para>
|
---|
6159 |
|
---|
6160 | <para>
|
---|
6161 | Finally, the particular user should define which VM should be
|
---|
6162 | started at boot or not. The user should run the following command
|
---|
6163 | for every VM it desired to start at boot:
|
---|
6164 | </para>
|
---|
6165 |
|
---|
6166 | <screen>VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM name or UUID</replaceable> --autostart-enabled on</screen>
|
---|
6167 |
|
---|
6168 | <para>
|
---|
6169 | The user can remove the particular VM from the VMs starting at boot
|
---|
6170 | by running the following command:
|
---|
6171 | </para>
|
---|
6172 |
|
---|
6173 | <screen>VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM name or UUID</replaceable> --autostart-enabled off</screen>
|
---|
6174 |
|
---|
6175 | </sect2>
|
---|
6176 |
|
---|
6177 | </sect1>
|
---|
6178 |
|
---|
6179 | <sect1 id="vboxexpertstoragemgmt">
|
---|
6180 |
|
---|
6181 | <title>&product-name; Expert Storage Management</title>
|
---|
6182 |
|
---|
6183 | <para>
|
---|
6184 | In case the snapshot model of &product-name; is not sufficient it
|
---|
6185 | is possible to enable a special mode which makes it possible to
|
---|
6186 | reconfigure storage attachments while the VM is paused. The user
|
---|
6187 | has to make sure that the disk data stays consistent to the guest
|
---|
6188 | because unlike with hotplugging the guest is not informed about
|
---|
6189 | detached or newly attached media.
|
---|
6190 | </para>
|
---|
6191 |
|
---|
6192 | <para>
|
---|
6193 | The expert storage management mode can be enabled per VM
|
---|
6194 | executing:
|
---|
6195 | </para>
|
---|
6196 |
|
---|
6197 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal2/SilentReconfigureWhilePaused" 1</screen>
|
---|
6198 |
|
---|
6199 | <para>
|
---|
6200 | You can reconfigure storage attachments later while the VM is
|
---|
6201 | paused by using the <command>VBoxManage storageattach</command>
|
---|
6202 | command.
|
---|
6203 | </para>
|
---|
6204 |
|
---|
6205 | </sect1>
|
---|
6206 |
|
---|
6207 | <sect1 id="hostpowertweaks">
|
---|
6208 |
|
---|
6209 | <title>Handling of Host Power Management Events</title>
|
---|
6210 |
|
---|
6211 | <para>
|
---|
6212 | Some host power management events are handled by &product-name;.
|
---|
6213 | The actual behavior depends on the platform:
|
---|
6214 | </para>
|
---|
6215 |
|
---|
6216 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
6217 |
|
---|
6218 | <listitem>
|
---|
6219 | <para>
|
---|
6220 | <emphasis role="bold">Host Suspends.</emphasis> This event is
|
---|
6221 | generated when the host is about to suspend, that is, the host
|
---|
6222 | saves the state to some non-volatile storage and powers off.
|
---|
6223 | </para>
|
---|
6224 |
|
---|
6225 | <para>
|
---|
6226 | This event is currently only handled on Windows hosts and Mac
|
---|
6227 | OS X hosts. When this event is generated, &product-name; will
|
---|
6228 | pause all running VMs.
|
---|
6229 | </para>
|
---|
6230 | </listitem>
|
---|
6231 |
|
---|
6232 | <listitem>
|
---|
6233 | <para>
|
---|
6234 | <emphasis role="bold">Host Resumes.</emphasis> This event is
|
---|
6235 | generated when the host woke up from the suspended state.
|
---|
6236 | </para>
|
---|
6237 |
|
---|
6238 | <para>
|
---|
6239 | This event is currently only handled on Windows hosts and Mac
|
---|
6240 | OS X hosts. When this event is generated, &product-name; will
|
---|
6241 | resume all VMs which are where paused before.
|
---|
6242 | </para>
|
---|
6243 | </listitem>
|
---|
6244 |
|
---|
6245 | <listitem>
|
---|
6246 | <para>
|
---|
6247 | <emphasis role="bold">Battery Low.</emphasis> The battery
|
---|
6248 | level reached a critical level, usually less than 5 percent
|
---|
6249 | charged.
|
---|
6250 | </para>
|
---|
6251 |
|
---|
6252 | <para>
|
---|
6253 | This event is currently only handled on Windows hosts and Mac
|
---|
6254 | OS X hosts. When this event is generated, &product-name; will
|
---|
6255 | save the state and terminate all VMs in preparation of a
|
---|
6256 | potential host powerdown.
|
---|
6257 | </para>
|
---|
6258 |
|
---|
6259 | <para>
|
---|
6260 | The behavior can be configured. By executing the following
|
---|
6261 | command, no VM is saved:
|
---|
6262 | </para>
|
---|
6263 |
|
---|
6264 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global "VBoxInternal2/SavestateOnBatteryLow" 0</screen>
|
---|
6265 |
|
---|
6266 | <para>
|
---|
6267 | This is a global setting as well as a per-VM setting. The
|
---|
6268 | per-VM value has higher precedence than the global value. The
|
---|
6269 | following command will save the state of all VMs but will not
|
---|
6270 | save the state of VM "foo":
|
---|
6271 | </para>
|
---|
6272 |
|
---|
6273 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata global "VBoxInternal2/SavestateOnBatteryLow" 1
|
---|
6274 | $ VBoxManage setextradata "foo" "VBoxInternal2/SavestateOnBatteryLow" 0</screen>
|
---|
6275 |
|
---|
6276 | <para>
|
---|
6277 | The first line is actually not required as by default the
|
---|
6278 | savestate action is performed.
|
---|
6279 | </para>
|
---|
6280 | </listitem>
|
---|
6281 |
|
---|
6282 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
6283 |
|
---|
6284 | </sect1>
|
---|
6285 |
|
---|
6286 | <sect1 id="sse412passthrough">
|
---|
6287 |
|
---|
6288 | <title>Passing Through SSE4.1/SSE4.2 Instructions</title>
|
---|
6289 |
|
---|
6290 | <para>
|
---|
6291 | To provide SSE 4.1/SSE 4.2 support to guests, the host CPU has to
|
---|
6292 | implement these instruction sets. The instruction sets are exposed
|
---|
6293 | to guests by default, but it is possible to disable the
|
---|
6294 | instructions for certain guests by using the following commands:
|
---|
6295 | </para>
|
---|
6296 |
|
---|
6297 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
6298 | VBoxInternal/CPUM/IsaExts/SSE4.1 0
|
---|
6299 | $ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
6300 | VBoxInternal/CPUM/IsaExts/SSE4.2 0</screen>
|
---|
6301 |
|
---|
6302 | <para>
|
---|
6303 | These are per-VM settings which are enabled by default.
|
---|
6304 | </para>
|
---|
6305 |
|
---|
6306 | </sect1>
|
---|
6307 |
|
---|
6308 | <sect1 id="hidledssync">
|
---|
6309 |
|
---|
6310 | <title>Support for Keyboard Indicator Synchronization</title>
|
---|
6311 |
|
---|
6312 | <para>
|
---|
6313 | This feature makes the host keyboard indicators (LEDs) match those
|
---|
6314 | of the VM's emulated keyboard when the machine window is active.
|
---|
6315 | It is currently implemented for Mac OS X and Windows hosts. This
|
---|
6316 | feature is enabled by default on supported host OSes. You can
|
---|
6317 | disable this feature by running the following command:
|
---|
6318 | </para>
|
---|
6319 |
|
---|
6320 | <screen>$ VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> GUI/HidLedsSync 0</screen>
|
---|
6321 |
|
---|
6322 | <para>
|
---|
6323 | This is a per-VM setting that is enabled by default.
|
---|
6324 | </para>
|
---|
6325 |
|
---|
6326 | </sect1>
|
---|
6327 |
|
---|
6328 | <sect1 id="usbtrafficcapturing">
|
---|
6329 |
|
---|
6330 | <title>Capturing USB Traffic for Selected Devices</title>
|
---|
6331 |
|
---|
6332 | <para>
|
---|
6333 | You can capture USB traffic for single USB devices or on the root
|
---|
6334 | hub level, which captures the traffic of all USB devices attached
|
---|
6335 | to the root hub. &product-name; stores the traffic in a format
|
---|
6336 | which is compatible with Wireshark. To capture the traffic of a
|
---|
6337 | specific USB device it must be attached to the VM with
|
---|
6338 | <command>VBoxManage</command> using the following command:
|
---|
6339 | </para>
|
---|
6340 |
|
---|
6341 | <screen>VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> usbattach <replaceable>device uuid</replaceable>|<replaceable>address</replaceable> --capturefile <replaceable>filename</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6342 |
|
---|
6343 | <para>
|
---|
6344 | In order to enable capturing on the root hub use the following
|
---|
6345 | command while the VM is not running:
|
---|
6346 | </para>
|
---|
6347 |
|
---|
6348 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
6349 | VBoxInternal/Devices/usb-ehci/0/LUN#0/Config/CaptureFilename <replaceable>filename</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6350 |
|
---|
6351 | <para>
|
---|
6352 | The command above enables capturing on the root hub attached to
|
---|
6353 | the EHCI controller. To enable it for the OHCI or XHCI controller
|
---|
6354 | replace <literal>usb-ehci</literal> with
|
---|
6355 | <literal>usb-ohci</literal> or <literal>usb-xhci</literal>,
|
---|
6356 | respectively.
|
---|
6357 | </para>
|
---|
6358 |
|
---|
6359 | </sect1>
|
---|
6360 |
|
---|
6361 | <sect1 id="heartbeatservice">
|
---|
6362 |
|
---|
6363 | <title>Configuring the Heartbeat Service</title>
|
---|
6364 |
|
---|
6365 | <para>
|
---|
6366 | &product-name; ships a simple heartbeat service. Once the Guest
|
---|
6367 | Additions are active, the guest sends frequent heartbeat pings to
|
---|
6368 | the host. If the guest stops sending the heartbeat pings without
|
---|
6369 | properly terminating the service, the VM process will log this
|
---|
6370 | event in the VBox.log file. In the future it might be possible to
|
---|
6371 | configure dedicated actions but for now there is only a warning in
|
---|
6372 | the log file.
|
---|
6373 | </para>
|
---|
6374 |
|
---|
6375 | <para>
|
---|
6376 | There are two parameters to configure. The <emphasis>heartbeat
|
---|
6377 | interval</emphasis> defines the time between two heartbeat pings.
|
---|
6378 | The default value is 2 seconds, that is, the heartbeat service of
|
---|
6379 | the &product-name; Guest Additions will send a heartbeat ping
|
---|
6380 | every two seconds. The value in nanoseconds can be configured like
|
---|
6381 | this:
|
---|
6382 | </para>
|
---|
6383 |
|
---|
6384 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
6385 | VBoxInternal/Devices/VMMDev/0/Config/HeartbeatInterval 2000000000</screen>
|
---|
6386 |
|
---|
6387 | <para>
|
---|
6388 | The <emphasis>heartbeat timeout</emphasis> defines the time the
|
---|
6389 | host waits starting from the last heartbeat ping before it defines
|
---|
6390 | the guest as unresponsive. The default value is 2 times the
|
---|
6391 | heartbeat interval (4 seconds) and can be configured as following,
|
---|
6392 | in nanoseconds:
|
---|
6393 | </para>
|
---|
6394 |
|
---|
6395 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
6396 | VBoxInternal/Devices/VMMDev/0/Config/HeartbeatTimeout 4000000000</screen>
|
---|
6397 |
|
---|
6398 | <para>
|
---|
6399 | If the heartbeat timeout expires, there will be a log message like
|
---|
6400 | <emphasis>VMMDev: HeartBeatCheckTimer: Guest seems to be
|
---|
6401 | unresponsive. Last heartbeat received 5 seconds ago.</emphasis> If
|
---|
6402 | another heartbeat ping arrives after this warning, there will be a
|
---|
6403 | log message like <emphasis>VMMDev: GuestHeartBeat: Guest is
|
---|
6404 | alive.</emphasis>
|
---|
6405 | </para>
|
---|
6406 |
|
---|
6407 | </sect1>
|
---|
6408 |
|
---|
6409 | <sect1 id="diskencryption">
|
---|
6410 |
|
---|
6411 | <title>Encryption of Disk Images</title>
|
---|
6412 |
|
---|
6413 | <para>
|
---|
6414 | &product-name; enables you to transparently encrypt the data
|
---|
6415 | stored in hard disk images for the guest. It does not depend on a
|
---|
6416 | specific image format to be used. Images which have the data
|
---|
6417 | encrypted are not portable between &product-name; and other
|
---|
6418 | virtualization software.
|
---|
6419 | </para>
|
---|
6420 |
|
---|
6421 | <para>
|
---|
6422 | &product-name; uses the AES algorithm in XTS mode and supports
|
---|
6423 | 128-bit or 256-bit data encryption keys (DEK). The DEK is stored
|
---|
6424 | encrypted in the medium properties and is decrypted during VM
|
---|
6425 | startup by entering a password which was chosen when the image was
|
---|
6426 | encrypted.
|
---|
6427 | </para>
|
---|
6428 |
|
---|
6429 | <para>
|
---|
6430 | Since the DEK is stored as part of the VM configuration file, it
|
---|
6431 | is important that it is kept safe. Losing the DEK means that the
|
---|
6432 | data stored in the disk images is lost irrecoverably. Having
|
---|
6433 | complete and up to date backups of all data related to the VM is
|
---|
6434 | the responsibility of the user.
|
---|
6435 | </para>
|
---|
6436 |
|
---|
6437 | <sect2 id="diskencryption-limitations">
|
---|
6438 |
|
---|
6439 | <title>Limitations of Disk Encryption</title>
|
---|
6440 |
|
---|
6441 | <para>
|
---|
6442 | There are some limitations the user needs to be aware of when
|
---|
6443 | using this feature:
|
---|
6444 | </para>
|
---|
6445 |
|
---|
6446 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
6447 |
|
---|
6448 | <listitem>
|
---|
6449 | <para>
|
---|
6450 | This feature is part of the &product-name; Extension Pack,
|
---|
6451 | which needs to be installed. Otherwise disk encryption is
|
---|
6452 | unavailable.
|
---|
6453 | </para>
|
---|
6454 | </listitem>
|
---|
6455 |
|
---|
6456 | <listitem>
|
---|
6457 | <para>
|
---|
6458 | Since encryption works only on the stored user data, it is
|
---|
6459 | currently not possible to check for metadata integrity of
|
---|
6460 | the disk image. Attackers might destroy data by removing or
|
---|
6461 | changing blocks of data in the image or change metadata
|
---|
6462 | items such as the disk size.
|
---|
6463 | </para>
|
---|
6464 | </listitem>
|
---|
6465 |
|
---|
6466 | <listitem>
|
---|
6467 | <para>
|
---|
6468 | Exporting appliances which contain encrypted disk images is
|
---|
6469 | not possible because the OVF specification does not support
|
---|
6470 | this. All images are therefore decrypted during export.
|
---|
6471 | </para>
|
---|
6472 | </listitem>
|
---|
6473 |
|
---|
6474 | <listitem>
|
---|
6475 | <para>
|
---|
6476 | The DEK is kept in memory while the VM is running to be able
|
---|
6477 | to decrypt data read and encrypt data written by the guest.
|
---|
6478 | While this should be obvious the user needs to be aware of
|
---|
6479 | this because an attacker might be able to extract the key on
|
---|
6480 | a compromised host and decrypt the data.
|
---|
6481 | </para>
|
---|
6482 | </listitem>
|
---|
6483 |
|
---|
6484 | <listitem>
|
---|
6485 | <para>
|
---|
6486 | When encrypting or decrypting the images, the password is
|
---|
6487 | passed in clear text using the &product-name; API. This
|
---|
6488 | needs to be kept in mind, especially when using third party
|
---|
6489 | API clients which make use of the webservice where the
|
---|
6490 | password might be transmitted over the network. The use of
|
---|
6491 | HTTPS is mandatory in such a case.
|
---|
6492 | </para>
|
---|
6493 | </listitem>
|
---|
6494 |
|
---|
6495 | <listitem>
|
---|
6496 | <para>
|
---|
6497 | Encrypting images with differencing images is only possible
|
---|
6498 | if there are no snapshots or a linear chain of snapshots.
|
---|
6499 | This limitation may be addressed in a future &product-name;
|
---|
6500 | version.
|
---|
6501 | </para>
|
---|
6502 | </listitem>
|
---|
6503 |
|
---|
6504 | <listitem>
|
---|
6505 | <para>
|
---|
6506 | The disk encryption feature can protect the content of the
|
---|
6507 | disks configured for a VM only. It does not cover any other
|
---|
6508 | data related to a VM, including saved state or the
|
---|
6509 | configuration file itself.
|
---|
6510 | </para>
|
---|
6511 | </listitem>
|
---|
6512 |
|
---|
6513 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
6514 |
|
---|
6515 | </sect2>
|
---|
6516 |
|
---|
6517 | <sect2 id="diskencryption-encryption">
|
---|
6518 |
|
---|
6519 | <title>Encrypting Disk Images</title>
|
---|
6520 |
|
---|
6521 | <para>
|
---|
6522 | Encrypting disk images can be done either using the GUI or
|
---|
6523 | <command>VBoxManage</command>. While the GUI is easier to use,
|
---|
6524 | it works on a per VM basis and encrypts all disk images attached
|
---|
6525 | to the specific VM. With <command>VBoxManage</command> one can
|
---|
6526 | encrypt individual images, including all differencing images. To
|
---|
6527 | encrypt an unencrypted medium with
|
---|
6528 | <command>VBoxManage</command>, use:
|
---|
6529 | </para>
|
---|
6530 |
|
---|
6531 | <screen>VBoxManage encryptmedium <replaceable>uuid</replaceable>|<replaceable>filename</replaceable> \
|
---|
6532 | --newpassword <replaceable>filename</replaceable>|- --cipher <replaceable>cipher-ID</replaceable> --newpasswordid "<replaceable>ID</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6533 |
|
---|
6534 | <para>
|
---|
6535 | To supply the encryption password point
|
---|
6536 | <command>VBoxManage</command> to the file where the password is
|
---|
6537 | stored or specify <option>-</option> to let VBoxManage ask you
|
---|
6538 | for the password on the command line.
|
---|
6539 | </para>
|
---|
6540 |
|
---|
6541 | <para>
|
---|
6542 | The cipher parameter specifies the cipher to use for encryption
|
---|
6543 | and can be either <literal>AES-XTS128-PLAIN64</literal> or
|
---|
6544 | <literal>AES-XTS256-PLAIN64</literal>. The specified password
|
---|
6545 | identifier can be freely chosen by the user and is used for
|
---|
6546 | correct identification when supplying multiple passwords during
|
---|
6547 | VM startup.
|
---|
6548 | </para>
|
---|
6549 |
|
---|
6550 | <para>
|
---|
6551 | If the user uses the same password when encrypting multiple
|
---|
6552 | images and also the same password identifier, the user needs to
|
---|
6553 | supply the password only once during VM startup.
|
---|
6554 | </para>
|
---|
6555 |
|
---|
6556 | </sect2>
|
---|
6557 |
|
---|
6558 | <sect2 id="diskencryption-startvm">
|
---|
6559 |
|
---|
6560 | <title>Starting a VM with Encrypted Images</title>
|
---|
6561 |
|
---|
6562 | <para>
|
---|
6563 | When a VM is started using the GUI, a dialog will open where the
|
---|
6564 | user needs to enter all passwords for all encrypted images
|
---|
6565 | attached to the VM. If another frontend like VBoxHeadless is
|
---|
6566 | used, the VM will be paused as soon as the guest tries to access
|
---|
6567 | an encrypted disk. The user needs to provide the passwords
|
---|
6568 | through <command>VBoxManage</command> using the following
|
---|
6569 | command:
|
---|
6570 | </para>
|
---|
6571 |
|
---|
6572 | <screen>VBoxManage controlvm <replaceable>uuid</replaceable>|<replaceable>vmname</replaceable> addencpassword <replaceable>ID</replaceable> <replaceable>password</replaceable> [--removeonsuspend yes|no]</screen>
|
---|
6573 |
|
---|
6574 | <para>
|
---|
6575 | <replaceable>ID</replaceable> must be the same as the password
|
---|
6576 | identifier supplied when encrypting the images.
|
---|
6577 | <replaceable>password</replaceable> is the password used when
|
---|
6578 | encrypting the images. Optionally, you can specify
|
---|
6579 | <option>--removeonsuspend yes|no</option> to specify whether to
|
---|
6580 | remove the password from VM memory when the VM is suspended.
|
---|
6581 | Before the VM can be resumed, the user needs to supply the
|
---|
6582 | passwords again. This is useful when a VM is suspended by a host
|
---|
6583 | suspend event and the user does not want the password to remain
|
---|
6584 | in memory.
|
---|
6585 | </para>
|
---|
6586 |
|
---|
6587 | </sect2>
|
---|
6588 |
|
---|
6589 | <sect2 id="diskencryption-decryption">
|
---|
6590 |
|
---|
6591 | <title>Decrypting Encrypted Images</title>
|
---|
6592 |
|
---|
6593 | <para>
|
---|
6594 | In some circumstances it might be required to decrypt previously
|
---|
6595 | encrypted images. This can be done in the GUI for a complete VM
|
---|
6596 | or using <command>VBoxManage</command> with the following
|
---|
6597 | command:
|
---|
6598 | </para>
|
---|
6599 |
|
---|
6600 | <screen>VBoxManage encryptmedium <replaceable>uuid</replaceable>|<replaceable>filename</replaceable> --oldpassword <replaceable>file</replaceable>|-</screen>
|
---|
6601 |
|
---|
6602 | <para>
|
---|
6603 | The only required parameter is the password the image was
|
---|
6604 | encrypted with. The options are the same as for encrypting
|
---|
6605 | images.
|
---|
6606 | </para>
|
---|
6607 |
|
---|
6608 | </sect2>
|
---|
6609 |
|
---|
6610 | </sect1>
|
---|
6611 |
|
---|
6612 | <sect1 id="gimdebug">
|
---|
6613 |
|
---|
6614 | <title>Paravirtualized Debugging</title>
|
---|
6615 |
|
---|
6616 | <para>
|
---|
6617 | This section covers debugging of guest operating systems using
|
---|
6618 | interfaces supported by paravirtualization providers.
|
---|
6619 | </para>
|
---|
6620 |
|
---|
6621 | <note>
|
---|
6622 | <para>
|
---|
6623 | Paravirtualized debugging significantly alter guest operating
|
---|
6624 | system behaviour and should only be used by expert users for
|
---|
6625 | debugging and diagnostics.
|
---|
6626 | </para>
|
---|
6627 | </note>
|
---|
6628 |
|
---|
6629 | <para>
|
---|
6630 | These debug options are specified as a string of key-value pairs
|
---|
6631 | separated by commas. An empty string disables paravirtualized
|
---|
6632 | debugging.
|
---|
6633 | </para>
|
---|
6634 |
|
---|
6635 | <sect2 id="gimdebughyperv">
|
---|
6636 |
|
---|
6637 | <title>Hyper-V Debug Options</title>
|
---|
6638 |
|
---|
6639 | <para>
|
---|
6640 | All of the options listed below are optional, and thus the
|
---|
6641 | default value specified will be used when the corresponding
|
---|
6642 | key-value pair is not specified.
|
---|
6643 | </para>
|
---|
6644 |
|
---|
6645 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
6646 |
|
---|
6647 | <listitem>
|
---|
6648 | <para>
|
---|
6649 | Key:
|
---|
6650 | <emphasis role="bold"><literal>enabled</literal></emphasis>
|
---|
6651 | </para>
|
---|
6652 |
|
---|
6653 | <para>
|
---|
6654 | Value: <literal>0</literal> or <literal>1</literal>
|
---|
6655 | </para>
|
---|
6656 |
|
---|
6657 | <para>
|
---|
6658 | Default: <literal>0</literal>
|
---|
6659 | </para>
|
---|
6660 |
|
---|
6661 | <para>
|
---|
6662 | Specify <literal>1</literal> to enable the Hyper-V debug
|
---|
6663 | interface. If this key-value pair is not specified or the
|
---|
6664 | value is not <literal>1</literal>, the Hyper-V debug
|
---|
6665 | interface is disabled regardless of other key-value pairs
|
---|
6666 | being present.
|
---|
6667 | </para>
|
---|
6668 | </listitem>
|
---|
6669 |
|
---|
6670 | <listitem>
|
---|
6671 | <para>
|
---|
6672 | Key:
|
---|
6673 | <emphasis role="bold"><literal>address</literal></emphasis>
|
---|
6674 | </para>
|
---|
6675 |
|
---|
6676 | <para>
|
---|
6677 | Value: IPv4 address
|
---|
6678 | </para>
|
---|
6679 |
|
---|
6680 | <para>
|
---|
6681 | Default: 127.0.0.1
|
---|
6682 | </para>
|
---|
6683 |
|
---|
6684 | <para>
|
---|
6685 | Specify the IPv4 address where the remote debugger is
|
---|
6686 | connected.
|
---|
6687 | </para>
|
---|
6688 | </listitem>
|
---|
6689 |
|
---|
6690 | <listitem>
|
---|
6691 | <para>
|
---|
6692 | Key:
|
---|
6693 | <emphasis role="bold"><literal>port</literal></emphasis>
|
---|
6694 | </para>
|
---|
6695 |
|
---|
6696 | <para>
|
---|
6697 | Value: UDP port number
|
---|
6698 | </para>
|
---|
6699 |
|
---|
6700 | <para>
|
---|
6701 | Default: 50000
|
---|
6702 | </para>
|
---|
6703 |
|
---|
6704 | <para>
|
---|
6705 | Specify the UDP port number where the remote debugger is
|
---|
6706 | connected.
|
---|
6707 | </para>
|
---|
6708 | </listitem>
|
---|
6709 |
|
---|
6710 | <listitem>
|
---|
6711 | <para>
|
---|
6712 | Key:
|
---|
6713 | <emphasis role="bold"><literal>vendor</literal></emphasis>
|
---|
6714 | </para>
|
---|
6715 |
|
---|
6716 | <para>
|
---|
6717 | Value: Hyper-V vendor signature reported by CPUID to the
|
---|
6718 | guest
|
---|
6719 | </para>
|
---|
6720 |
|
---|
6721 | <para>
|
---|
6722 | Default: When debugging is enabled: <literal>Microsoft
|
---|
6723 | Hv</literal>, otherwise: <literal>VBoxVBoxVBox</literal>
|
---|
6724 | </para>
|
---|
6725 |
|
---|
6726 | <para>
|
---|
6727 | Specify the Hyper-V vendor signature which is exposed to the
|
---|
6728 | guest by CPUID. For debugging Microsoft Windows guests, it
|
---|
6729 | is required the hypervisor reports the Microsoft vendor.
|
---|
6730 | </para>
|
---|
6731 | </listitem>
|
---|
6732 |
|
---|
6733 | <listitem>
|
---|
6734 | <para>
|
---|
6735 | Key:
|
---|
6736 | <emphasis role="bold"><literal>hypercallinterface</literal>
|
---|
6737 | </emphasis>
|
---|
6738 | </para>
|
---|
6739 |
|
---|
6740 | <para>
|
---|
6741 | Value: <literal>0</literal> or <literal>1</literal>
|
---|
6742 | </para>
|
---|
6743 |
|
---|
6744 | <para>
|
---|
6745 | Default: <literal>0</literal>
|
---|
6746 | </para>
|
---|
6747 |
|
---|
6748 | <para>
|
---|
6749 | Specify whether hypercalls should be suggested for
|
---|
6750 | initiating debug data transfers between host and guest
|
---|
6751 | rather than MSRs when requested by the guest.
|
---|
6752 | </para>
|
---|
6753 | </listitem>
|
---|
6754 |
|
---|
6755 | <listitem>
|
---|
6756 | <para>
|
---|
6757 | Key: <emphasis role="bold"><literal>vsinterface</literal>
|
---|
6758 | </emphasis>
|
---|
6759 | </para>
|
---|
6760 |
|
---|
6761 | <para>
|
---|
6762 | Value: <literal>0</literal> or <literal>1</literal>
|
---|
6763 | </para>
|
---|
6764 |
|
---|
6765 | <para>
|
---|
6766 | Default: When debugging is enabled, <literal>1</literal>,
|
---|
6767 | otherwise <literal>0</literal>
|
---|
6768 | </para>
|
---|
6769 |
|
---|
6770 | <para>
|
---|
6771 | Specify whether to expose the VS#1 virtualization service
|
---|
6772 | interface to the guest. This interface is required for
|
---|
6773 | debugging Microsoft Windows 10 32-bit guests, but is
|
---|
6774 | optional for other Windows versions.
|
---|
6775 | </para>
|
---|
6776 | </listitem>
|
---|
6777 |
|
---|
6778 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
6779 |
|
---|
6780 | <sect3 id="gimdebughyperv-windows-setup">
|
---|
6781 |
|
---|
6782 | <title>Setting up Windows Guests for Debugging with the Hyper-V
|
---|
6783 | Paravirtualization Provider</title>
|
---|
6784 |
|
---|
6785 | <para>
|
---|
6786 | Windows supports debugging over a serial cable, USB, IEEE 1394
|
---|
6787 | Firewire, and Ethernet. USB and IEEE 1394 are not applicable
|
---|
6788 | for virtual machines, and Ethernet requires Windows 8 or
|
---|
6789 | later. While a serial connection is universally usable, it is
|
---|
6790 | slow.
|
---|
6791 | </para>
|
---|
6792 |
|
---|
6793 | <para>
|
---|
6794 | Debugging using the Hyper-V debug transport, supported on
|
---|
6795 | Windows Vista and later, offers significant benefits. It
|
---|
6796 | provides excellent performance due to direct host-to-guest
|
---|
6797 | transfers, it is easy to set up and requires minimal support
|
---|
6798 | from the hypervisor. It can be used with the debugger running
|
---|
6799 | on the same host as the VM or with the debugger and VM on
|
---|
6800 | separate machines connected over a network.
|
---|
6801 | </para>
|
---|
6802 |
|
---|
6803 | <para>
|
---|
6804 | <emphasis role="bold">Prerequisites</emphasis>
|
---|
6805 | </para>
|
---|
6806 |
|
---|
6807 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
6808 |
|
---|
6809 | <listitem>
|
---|
6810 | <para>
|
---|
6811 | A VM configured for Hyper-V paravirtualization running a
|
---|
6812 | Windows Vista or newer Windows guest. You can check the
|
---|
6813 | effective paravirtualization provider for your VM with the
|
---|
6814 | output of the following <command>VBoxManage</command>
|
---|
6815 | command:
|
---|
6816 | </para>
|
---|
6817 |
|
---|
6818 | <screen>$ VBoxManage showvminfo <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
6819 | </listitem>
|
---|
6820 |
|
---|
6821 | <listitem>
|
---|
6822 | <para>
|
---|
6823 | A sufficiently up-to-date version of the Microsoft WinDbg
|
---|
6824 | debugger required to debug the version of Windows in your
|
---|
6825 | VM.
|
---|
6826 | </para>
|
---|
6827 | </listitem>
|
---|
6828 |
|
---|
6829 | <listitem>
|
---|
6830 | <para>
|
---|
6831 | While Windows 8 and newer Windows guests ship with Hyper-V
|
---|
6832 | debug support, Windows 7 and Vista do not. To use Hyper-V
|
---|
6833 | debugging with a Windows 7 or Vista guest, copy the file
|
---|
6834 | <filename>kdvm.dll</filename> from a Windows 8.0
|
---|
6835 | installation. This file is typically located in
|
---|
6836 | <filename>C:\Windows\System32</filename>. Copy it to the
|
---|
6837 | same location in your Windows 7/Vista guest. Make sure you
|
---|
6838 | copy the 32-bit or 64-bit version of the DLL which matches
|
---|
6839 | your guest OS.
|
---|
6840 | </para>
|
---|
6841 |
|
---|
6842 | <note>
|
---|
6843 | <para>
|
---|
6844 | Only Windows 8.0 ships <filename>kdvm.dll</filename>.
|
---|
6845 | Windows 8.1 and newer Windows versions do not.
|
---|
6846 | </para>
|
---|
6847 | </note>
|
---|
6848 | </listitem>
|
---|
6849 |
|
---|
6850 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
6851 |
|
---|
6852 | <para>
|
---|
6853 | <emphasis role="bold">VM and Guest Configuration</emphasis>
|
---|
6854 | </para>
|
---|
6855 |
|
---|
6856 | <orderedlist>
|
---|
6857 |
|
---|
6858 | <listitem>
|
---|
6859 | <para>
|
---|
6860 | Power off the VM.
|
---|
6861 | </para>
|
---|
6862 | </listitem>
|
---|
6863 |
|
---|
6864 | <listitem>
|
---|
6865 | <para>
|
---|
6866 | Enable the debug options with the following
|
---|
6867 | <command>VBoxManage</command> command:
|
---|
6868 | </para>
|
---|
6869 |
|
---|
6870 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> --paravirtdebug "enabled=1"</screen>
|
---|
6871 |
|
---|
6872 | <para>
|
---|
6873 | The above command assumes your debugger will connect to
|
---|
6874 | your host machine on UDP port 50000. However, if you need
|
---|
6875 | to run the debugger on a remote machine you may specify
|
---|
6876 | the remote address and port here. For example:
|
---|
6877 | </para>
|
---|
6878 |
|
---|
6879 | <screen>$ VBoxManage modifyvm <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> \
|
---|
6880 | --paravirtdebug "enabled=1,address=192.168.32.1,port=55000"</screen>
|
---|
6881 |
|
---|
6882 | <para>
|
---|
6883 | See <xref linkend="gimdebughyperv" /> for the complete set
|
---|
6884 | of options.
|
---|
6885 | </para>
|
---|
6886 | </listitem>
|
---|
6887 |
|
---|
6888 | <listitem>
|
---|
6889 | <para>
|
---|
6890 | Start the VM.
|
---|
6891 | </para>
|
---|
6892 | </listitem>
|
---|
6893 |
|
---|
6894 | <listitem>
|
---|
6895 | <para>
|
---|
6896 | In the guest, start an elevated command prompt and execute
|
---|
6897 | the following commands:
|
---|
6898 | </para>
|
---|
6899 |
|
---|
6900 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
6901 |
|
---|
6902 | <listitem>
|
---|
6903 | <para>
|
---|
6904 | For a Windows 8 or newer Windows guest:
|
---|
6905 | </para>
|
---|
6906 |
|
---|
6907 | <screen>bcdedit /dbgsettings net hostip:5.5.5.5 port:50000 key:1.2.3.4</screen>
|
---|
6908 | </listitem>
|
---|
6909 |
|
---|
6910 | <listitem>
|
---|
6911 | <para>
|
---|
6912 | For a Windows 7 or Vista guest:
|
---|
6913 | </para>
|
---|
6914 |
|
---|
6915 | <screen>bcdedit /set loadoptions host_ip=5.5.5.5,host_port=50000,encryption_key=1.2.3.4</screen>
|
---|
6916 |
|
---|
6917 | <screen>bcdedit /set dbgtransport kdvm.dll</screen>
|
---|
6918 |
|
---|
6919 | <para>
|
---|
6920 | The IP address and port in the
|
---|
6921 | <command>bcdedit</command> command are ignored when
|
---|
6922 | using the Hyper-V debug transport. Any valid IP and a
|
---|
6923 | port number greater than 49151 and lower than 65536
|
---|
6924 | can be entered.
|
---|
6925 | </para>
|
---|
6926 |
|
---|
6927 | <para>
|
---|
6928 | The encryption key in the <command>bcdedit</command>
|
---|
6929 | command is relevant and must be valid. The key
|
---|
6930 | "1.2.3.4" used in the above example is valid and may
|
---|
6931 | be used if security is not a concern. If you do not
|
---|
6932 | specify any encryption key, <command>bcdedit</command>
|
---|
6933 | will generate one for you and you will need to copy
|
---|
6934 | this key to later enter in Microsoft WinDbg on the
|
---|
6935 | remote end. This encryption key is used to encrypt the
|
---|
6936 | debug data exchanged between Windows and the debugger.
|
---|
6937 | </para>
|
---|
6938 | </listitem>
|
---|
6939 |
|
---|
6940 | <listitem>
|
---|
6941 | <para>
|
---|
6942 | Run one or more of the following commands to enable
|
---|
6943 | debugging for the appropriate phase or component of
|
---|
6944 | your Windows guest:
|
---|
6945 | </para>
|
---|
6946 |
|
---|
6947 | <screen>bcdedit /set debug on</screen>
|
---|
6948 |
|
---|
6949 | <screen>bcdedit /set bootdebug on</screen>
|
---|
6950 |
|
---|
6951 | <screen>bcdedit /set {bootmgr} bootdebug on</screen>
|
---|
6952 |
|
---|
6953 | <para>
|
---|
6954 | Please note that the <command>bootdebug</command>
|
---|
6955 | options are only effective on Windows 8 or newer when
|
---|
6956 | using the Hyper-V debug transport. Refer to Microsoft
|
---|
6957 | Windows documentation for detailed explanation of
|
---|
6958 | <command>bcdedit</command> options.
|
---|
6959 | </para>
|
---|
6960 | </listitem>
|
---|
6961 |
|
---|
6962 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
6963 | </listitem>
|
---|
6964 |
|
---|
6965 | <listitem>
|
---|
6966 | <para>
|
---|
6967 | Start Microsoft WinDbg on your host machine or remote
|
---|
6968 | host.
|
---|
6969 | </para>
|
---|
6970 |
|
---|
6971 | <para>
|
---|
6972 | From the <emphasis role="bold">File</emphasis> menu,
|
---|
6973 | select <emphasis role="bold">Kernel Debug</emphasis>. On
|
---|
6974 | the <emphasis role="bold">NET</emphasis> tab, specify the
|
---|
6975 | UDP port number you used in the
|
---|
6976 | <literal>paravirtdebug</literal> options. If you did not
|
---|
6977 | specify any, leave it as 50000. Ensure that the UDP port
|
---|
6978 | is not blocked by a firewall or other security software.
|
---|
6979 | </para>
|
---|
6980 |
|
---|
6981 | <para>
|
---|
6982 | In the <emphasis role="bold">Key</emphasis> field, enter
|
---|
6983 | <literal>1.2.3.4</literal> or the encryption key from the
|
---|
6984 | <command>bcdedit</command> command in your Windows guest.
|
---|
6985 | </para>
|
---|
6986 |
|
---|
6987 | <para>
|
---|
6988 | Click <emphasis role="bold">OK</emphasis> to start
|
---|
6989 | listening for connections. Microsoft WinDbg typically
|
---|
6990 | shows a Waiting to Reconnect message during this phase.
|
---|
6991 | </para>
|
---|
6992 |
|
---|
6993 | <para>
|
---|
6994 | Alternatively, to directly start a debug session, run
|
---|
6995 | WinDbg from the command line as follows :
|
---|
6996 | </para>
|
---|
6997 |
|
---|
6998 | <screen>windbg.exe -k net:port=50000,key=1.2.3.4</screen>
|
---|
6999 |
|
---|
7000 | <para>
|
---|
7001 | See the WinDbg documentation for the complete command line
|
---|
7002 | syntax.
|
---|
7003 | </para>
|
---|
7004 | </listitem>
|
---|
7005 |
|
---|
7006 | <listitem>
|
---|
7007 | <para>
|
---|
7008 | Reboot your Windows guest and it should then connect as a
|
---|
7009 | debuggee with Microsoft WinDbg.
|
---|
7010 | </para>
|
---|
7011 | </listitem>
|
---|
7012 |
|
---|
7013 | </orderedlist>
|
---|
7014 |
|
---|
7015 | </sect3>
|
---|
7016 |
|
---|
7017 | </sect2>
|
---|
7018 |
|
---|
7019 | </sect1>
|
---|
7020 |
|
---|
7021 | <sect1 id="pcspeaker_passthrough">
|
---|
7022 |
|
---|
7023 | <title>PC Speaker Passthrough</title>
|
---|
7024 |
|
---|
7025 | <para>
|
---|
7026 | As an experimental feature, primarily due to being limited to
|
---|
7027 | Linux host only and unknown Linux distribution coverage,
|
---|
7028 | &product-name; supports passing through the PC speaker to the
|
---|
7029 | host. The PC speaker, sometimes called the system speaker, is a
|
---|
7030 | way to produce audible feedback such as beeps without the need for
|
---|
7031 | regular audio and sound card support.
|
---|
7032 | </para>
|
---|
7033 |
|
---|
7034 | <para>
|
---|
7035 | The PC speaker passthrough feature in &product-name; handles beeps
|
---|
7036 | only. Advanced PC speaker use by the VM, such as PCM audio, will
|
---|
7037 | not work, resulting in undefined host behavior.
|
---|
7038 | </para>
|
---|
7039 |
|
---|
7040 | <para>
|
---|
7041 | Producing beeps on Linux is a very complex topic. &product-name;
|
---|
7042 | offers a collection of options, in an attempt to make this work
|
---|
7043 | deterministically and reliably on as many Linux distributions and
|
---|
7044 | system configurations as possible. These are summarized in the
|
---|
7045 | following table.
|
---|
7046 | </para>
|
---|
7047 |
|
---|
7048 | <table id="table-pcspeaker-config" tabstyle="oracle-all">
|
---|
7049 | <title>PC Speaker Configuration Options</title>
|
---|
7050 | <tgroup cols="3">
|
---|
7051 | <thead>
|
---|
7052 | <row>
|
---|
7053 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7054 | <emphasis role="bold">Code</emphasis>
|
---|
7055 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7056 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7057 | <emphasis role="bold">Device</emphasis>
|
---|
7058 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7059 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7060 | <emphasis role="bold">Notes</emphasis>
|
---|
7061 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7062 | </row>
|
---|
7063 | </thead>
|
---|
7064 | <tbody>
|
---|
7065 | <row>
|
---|
7066 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7067 | 1
|
---|
7068 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7069 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7070 | <filename>/dev/input/by-path/platform-pcspkr-event-spkr</filename>
|
---|
7071 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7072 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7073 | Direct host PC speaker use.
|
---|
7074 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7075 | </row>
|
---|
7076 | <row>
|
---|
7077 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7078 | 2
|
---|
7079 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7080 | <entry><filename>/dev/tty</filename></entry>
|
---|
7081 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7082 | Uses the terminal association of the VM process. VM
|
---|
7083 | needs to be started on a virtual console.
|
---|
7084 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7085 | </row>
|
---|
7086 | <row>
|
---|
7087 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7088 | 3
|
---|
7089 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7090 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7091 | <filename>/dev/tty0</filename> or
|
---|
7092 | <filename>/dev/vc/0</filename>
|
---|
7093 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7094 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7095 | Can only be used by user <literal>root</literal> or
|
---|
7096 | users with <literal>cap_sys_tty_config</literal>
|
---|
7097 | capability.
|
---|
7098 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7099 | </row>
|
---|
7100 | <row>
|
---|
7101 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7102 | 9
|
---|
7103 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7104 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7105 | A user-specified console or evdev device path.
|
---|
7106 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7107 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7108 | As for codes 1 to 3, but with a custom device path.
|
---|
7109 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7110 | </row>
|
---|
7111 | <row>
|
---|
7112 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7113 | 70
|
---|
7114 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7115 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7116 | <filename>/dev/tty</filename>
|
---|
7117 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7118 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7119 | Standard beep only. Loses frequency and length. See code
|
---|
7120 | 2.
|
---|
7121 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7122 | </row>
|
---|
7123 | <row>
|
---|
7124 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7125 | 79
|
---|
7126 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7127 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7128 | A user-specified terminal device path.
|
---|
7129 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7130 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7131 | As for code 70, but with a custom device path.
|
---|
7132 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7133 | </row>
|
---|
7134 | <row>
|
---|
7135 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7136 | 100
|
---|
7137 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7138 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7139 | All of the above.
|
---|
7140 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7141 | <entry><para>
|
---|
7142 | Tries all the available codes.
|
---|
7143 | </para></entry>
|
---|
7144 | </row>
|
---|
7145 | </tbody>
|
---|
7146 | </tgroup>
|
---|
7147 | </table>
|
---|
7148 |
|
---|
7149 | <para>
|
---|
7150 | To enable PC speaker passthrough use the following command:
|
---|
7151 | </para>
|
---|
7152 |
|
---|
7153 | <screen>VBoxManage setextradata <replaceable>VM-name</replaceable> "VBoxInternal/Devices/i8254/0/Config/PassthroughSpeaker" <replaceable>N</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
7154 |
|
---|
7155 | <para>
|
---|
7156 | Replace <replaceable>N</replaceable> with the code representing
|
---|
7157 | the case you want to use. Changing this setting takes effect when
|
---|
7158 | you next start the VM. It is safe to enable PC speaker passthrough
|
---|
7159 | on all host OSes. It will only have an effect on Linux.
|
---|
7160 | </para>
|
---|
7161 |
|
---|
7162 | <para>
|
---|
7163 | The VM log file, <filename>VBox.log</filename>, contains lines
|
---|
7164 | with the prefix <literal>PIT: speaker:</literal> showing the PC
|
---|
7165 | speaker passthrough setup activities. It gives hints which device
|
---|
7166 | it picked or why it failed.
|
---|
7167 | </para>
|
---|
7168 |
|
---|
7169 | <para>
|
---|
7170 | Enabling PC speaker passthrough for the VM is usually the simple
|
---|
7171 | part. The real difficulty is making sure that &product-name; can
|
---|
7172 | access the necessary device, because in a typical Linux install
|
---|
7173 | most of them can only be accessed by user <literal>root</literal>.
|
---|
7174 | You should follow the preferred way to persistently change this,
|
---|
7175 | such as by referring to your distribution's documentation. Since
|
---|
7176 | there are countless Linux distribution variants, we can only give
|
---|
7177 | the general hints that there is often a way to give the X11
|
---|
7178 | session user access to additional devices, or you need to find a
|
---|
7179 | working solution using a udev configuration file. If everything
|
---|
7180 | fails you might try setting the permissions using a script which
|
---|
7181 | is run late enough in the host system startup.
|
---|
7182 | </para>
|
---|
7183 |
|
---|
7184 | <para>
|
---|
7185 | Sometimes additional rules are applied by the kernel to limit
|
---|
7186 | access. For example, that the VM process must have the same
|
---|
7187 | controlling terminal as the device configured to be used for
|
---|
7188 | beeping, something which is often very difficult to achieve for
|
---|
7189 | GUI applications such as &product-name;. The table above contains
|
---|
7190 | some hints, but in general refer to the Linux documentation.
|
---|
7191 | </para>
|
---|
7192 |
|
---|
7193 | <para>
|
---|
7194 | If you have trouble getting any beeps even if the device
|
---|
7195 | permissions are set up and VBox.log confirms that it uses evdev or
|
---|
7196 | console for the PC speaker control, check if your system has a PC
|
---|
7197 | speaker. Some systems do not have one. Other complications can
|
---|
7198 | arise from Linux rerouting the PC speaker output to a sound card.
|
---|
7199 | Check if the beeps are audible if you connect speakers to your
|
---|
7200 | sound card. Today almost all systems have one. Finally, check if
|
---|
7201 | the audio mixer control has a channel named "beep", which could be
|
---|
7202 | hidden in the mixer settings, and that it is not muted.
|
---|
7203 | </para>
|
---|
7204 |
|
---|
7205 | </sect1>
|
---|
7206 |
|
---|
7207 | <sect1 id="usbip">
|
---|
7208 |
|
---|
7209 | <title>Accessing USB devices Exposed Over the Network with USB/IP</title>
|
---|
7210 |
|
---|
7211 | <para>
|
---|
7212 | &product-name; supports passing through USB devices which are
|
---|
7213 | exposed over the network using the USB over IP protocol without
|
---|
7214 | the need to configure the client side provided by the kernel and
|
---|
7215 | usbip tools. Furthermore, this feature works with &product-name;
|
---|
7216 | running on any supported host, rather than just Linux alone, as is
|
---|
7217 | the case with the official client.
|
---|
7218 | </para>
|
---|
7219 |
|
---|
7220 | <para>
|
---|
7221 | To enable support for passing through USB/IP devices, use the
|
---|
7222 | following command to add the device server that exports the
|
---|
7223 | devices:
|
---|
7224 | </para>
|
---|
7225 |
|
---|
7226 | <screen>VBoxManage usbdevsource add <replaceable>unique-name</replaceable> --backend <replaceable>USB-IP</replaceable> --address <replaceable>device-server</replaceable>[:<replaceable>port</replaceable>]</screen>
|
---|
7227 |
|
---|
7228 | <para>
|
---|
7229 | USB devices exported on the device server are then accessible
|
---|
7230 | through the GUI or <command>VBoxManage</command>, like any USB
|
---|
7231 | devices attached locally. This can be used multiple times to
|
---|
7232 | access different device servers.
|
---|
7233 | </para>
|
---|
7234 |
|
---|
7235 | <para>
|
---|
7236 | To remove a device server, the following command can be used:
|
---|
7237 | </para>
|
---|
7238 |
|
---|
7239 | <screen>$ VBoxManage usbdevsource remove <replaceable>unique-name</replaceable></screen>
|
---|
7240 |
|
---|
7241 | <sect2 id="usbip-setup-server">
|
---|
7242 |
|
---|
7243 | <title>Setting up USB/IP Support on a Linux System</title>
|
---|
7244 |
|
---|
7245 | <para>
|
---|
7246 | This section gives a brief overview on how to set up a Linux
|
---|
7247 | based system to act as a USB device server. The system on the
|
---|
7248 | server requires that the <filename>usbip-core.ko</filename> and
|
---|
7249 | <filename>usbip-host.ko</filename> kernel drivers are available,
|
---|
7250 | and that the USB/IP tools package is installed. The particular
|
---|
7251 | installation method for the necessary tools depends on which
|
---|
7252 | distribution is used. For example, for Debian based systems, use
|
---|
7253 | the following command to install the required tools:
|
---|
7254 | </para>
|
---|
7255 |
|
---|
7256 | <screen>$ apt-get install usbip-utils</screen>
|
---|
7257 |
|
---|
7258 | <para>
|
---|
7259 | To check whether the necessary tools are already installed use
|
---|
7260 | the following command:
|
---|
7261 | </para>
|
---|
7262 |
|
---|
7263 | <screen>
|
---|
7264 | $ usbip list -l
|
---|
7265 | </screen>
|
---|
7266 |
|
---|
7267 | <para>
|
---|
7268 | This should produce output similar to that shown in the example
|
---|
7269 | below:
|
---|
7270 | </para>
|
---|
7271 |
|
---|
7272 | <screen>
|
---|
7273 | - busid 4-2 (0bda:0301)
|
---|
7274 | Realtek Semiconductor Corp. : multicard reader (0bda:0301)
|
---|
7275 |
|
---|
7276 | - busid 5-1 (046d:c52b)
|
---|
7277 | Logitech, Inc. : Unifying Receiver (046d:c52b)
|
---|
7278 | </screen>
|
---|
7279 |
|
---|
7280 | <para>
|
---|
7281 | If everything is installed, the USB/IP server needs to be
|
---|
7282 | started as <literal>root</literal> using the following command:
|
---|
7283 | </para>
|
---|
7284 |
|
---|
7285 | <screen># usbipd -D</screen>
|
---|
7286 |
|
---|
7287 | <para>
|
---|
7288 | See the documentation for the installed distribution to
|
---|
7289 | determine how to start the service when the system boots.
|
---|
7290 | </para>
|
---|
7291 |
|
---|
7292 | <para>
|
---|
7293 | By default, no device on the server is exported. This must be
|
---|
7294 | done manually for each device. To export a device use the
|
---|
7295 | following command:
|
---|
7296 | </para>
|
---|
7297 |
|
---|
7298 | <screen># usbip bind -b "bus identifier"</screen>
|
---|
7299 |
|
---|
7300 | <para>
|
---|
7301 | To export the multicard reader in the previous example:
|
---|
7302 | </para>
|
---|
7303 |
|
---|
7304 | <screen># usbip bind -b 4-2</screen>
|
---|
7305 |
|
---|
7306 | </sect2>
|
---|
7307 |
|
---|
7308 | <sect2 id="usbip-security">
|
---|
7309 |
|
---|
7310 | <title>Security Considerations</title>
|
---|
7311 |
|
---|
7312 | <para>
|
---|
7313 | The communication between the server and client is unencrypted
|
---|
7314 | and there is no authorization required to access exported
|
---|
7315 | devices. An attacker might sniff sensitive data or gain control
|
---|
7316 | over a device. To mitigate this risk, the device should be
|
---|
7317 | exposed over a local network to which only trusted clients have
|
---|
7318 | access. To access the device remotely over a public network, a
|
---|
7319 | VPN solution should be used to provide the required level of
|
---|
7320 | security protection.
|
---|
7321 | </para>
|
---|
7322 |
|
---|
7323 | </sect2>
|
---|
7324 |
|
---|
7325 | </sect1>
|
---|
7326 |
|
---|
7327 | <sect1 id="hyperv-support">
|
---|
7328 |
|
---|
7329 | <title>Using Hyper-V with &product-name;</title>
|
---|
7330 |
|
---|
7331 | <para>
|
---|
7332 | &product-name; can be used on a Windows host where Hyper-V is
|
---|
7333 | running. This is an experimental feature.
|
---|
7334 | </para>
|
---|
7335 |
|
---|
7336 | <para>
|
---|
7337 | No configuration is required. &product-name; detects Hyper-V
|
---|
7338 | automatically and uses Hyper-V as the virtualization engine for
|
---|
7339 | the host system. The CPU icon in the VM window status bar
|
---|
7340 | indicates that Hyper-V is being used.
|
---|
7341 | </para>
|
---|
7342 |
|
---|
7343 | <note>
|
---|
7344 | <para>
|
---|
7345 | When using this feature, some host systems might experience
|
---|
7346 | significant &product-name; performance degradation.
|
---|
7347 | </para>
|
---|
7348 | </note>
|
---|
7349 |
|
---|
7350 | </sect1>
|
---|
7351 |
|
---|
7352 | <sect1 id="nested-virt">
|
---|
7353 |
|
---|
7354 | <title>Nested Virtualization</title>
|
---|
7355 |
|
---|
7356 | <para>
|
---|
7357 | &product-name; supports <emphasis>nested
|
---|
7358 | virtualization</emphasis>. This feature enables the passthrough of
|
---|
7359 | hardware virtualization functions to the guest VM. That means that
|
---|
7360 | you can install a hypervisor, such as &product-name;, Oracle VM
|
---|
7361 | Server or KVM, on an &product-name; guest. You can then create and
|
---|
7362 | run VMs within the guest VM.
|
---|
7363 | </para>
|
---|
7364 |
|
---|
7365 | <para>
|
---|
7366 | Hardware virtualization features not present on the host CPU will
|
---|
7367 | not be exposed to the guest. In addition, some features such as
|
---|
7368 | nested paging are not yet supported for passthrough to the guest.
|
---|
7369 | </para>
|
---|
7370 |
|
---|
7371 | <para>
|
---|
7372 | You can enable the nested virtualization feature in one of the
|
---|
7373 | following ways:
|
---|
7374 | </para>
|
---|
7375 |
|
---|
7376 | <itemizedlist>
|
---|
7377 |
|
---|
7378 | <listitem>
|
---|
7379 | <para>
|
---|
7380 | From the VirtualBox Manager, select the
|
---|
7381 | <emphasis role="bold">Enable Nested VT-x/AMD-V</emphasis>
|
---|
7382 | check box on the <emphasis role="bold">Processor</emphasis>
|
---|
7383 | tab. To disable the feature, deselect the check box.
|
---|
7384 | </para>
|
---|
7385 | </listitem>
|
---|
7386 |
|
---|
7387 | <listitem>
|
---|
7388 | <para>
|
---|
7389 | Use the <option>--nested-hw-virt</option> option of the
|
---|
7390 | <command>VBoxManage modifyvm</command> command to enable or
|
---|
7391 | disable nested virtualization. See
|
---|
7392 | <xref linkend="vboxmanage-modifyvm"/>.
|
---|
7393 | </para>
|
---|
7394 | </listitem>
|
---|
7395 |
|
---|
7396 | </itemizedlist>
|
---|
7397 |
|
---|
7398 | </sect1>
|
---|
7399 |
|
---|
7400 | <xi:include href="user_isomakercmd-man.xml" xpointer="element(/1)" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" />
|
---|
7401 |
|
---|
7402 | </chapter>
|
---|